DEWETRON DEWE-3210 3210, DEWE-3211 3211, DEWE-3213 3213 Data Acquisition System Owner's Guide

Owner’s Guide

Energy test Flight test Vehicle test

Industrial

DEWE-3210/3211 and DEWE-3213 battery powered data acquisition systems

Important notices

Contents © 2009-2010 Dewetron, Inc.

Some portions may be © Dewetron GesmbH or © Dewesoft d.o.o.

The contents of this manual are protected by copyright law, and may be reproduced only with the express written permission of Dewetron, Inc. All rights are reserved.

Contact the company at our address here:

Dewetron, Inc.

10 High Street, Ste K, Wakefield, RI 02879 USA

Telephone: +1 401-284-3750

Fax: +1 401-284-3755 email: [email protected] web: www.dewamerica.com

SideHAND is a registered trademark of Dewetron, Inc.

DEWESoft is a trademark of Dewesoft d.o.o.

Dewetron is a trademark of Dewetron GesmbH

Microsoft, Microsoft Windows XP and Microsoft Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation

Matlab® is a trademark of The Mathworks, Inc.

Flexpro® is a trademark of Weisang GMBH nCode is copyrighted by HBM, Inc.

Met/CAL® is a trademark of Fluke Corporation

Vector and DBC are the properties of Vector Informatik GmbH

Softing is is the property of Softing AG

All copyrights and trademarks acknowledged to be the properties of their owners.

Printed in USA

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Contents

OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs | iii

1

Introduction 1-1

Training 1-1

Support 1-1

Calibration 1-2

Certificate included 1-2

Models Covered 1-2

What’s in this Guide 1-2

And what is not in this guide: 1-2

2

Safety precautions 2-1

BIOS notification: 2-3

Windows updates and antivirus/security software 2-3

Problematic network stacks 2-3

Product End-of-Life Handling 2-3

System and Components Recycling 2-3

Restriction of Hazardous Substances 2-3

3

DEWE-3210 Series Specifications 3-1

Analog Input Specifications 3-1

Counter/Encoder Input Specifications 3-2

Computer System Specifications 3-3

Data Acquisition Software Specifications 3-4

System Dimensions 3-8

Top-level call-outs 3-9

Configuration guide, DEWE-3211 model 3-10

Configuration guide, DEWE-3210 model 3-10

4

System Connectors 4-1

iv | Table of Contents

System/PC connectors 4-1

Computer Connectors 4-3

Signal Input Connectors 4-9

Expansion connector (DEWE-3210 model) 4-11

DEWE-30-8-EXPANSION Rack (Optional) 4-12

System Startup Protocol 5-1

Installing the Smart Batteries 5-1

5

Operation Guidelines 5-1

Using the smart batteries 5-2

Turning on the System 5-3

Hardware Protocols 5-3

Using the removable hard disk drive 5-3

Using the Optical read/write drive 5-4

6

Connecting your Signals 6-1

Analog input connections 6-1

Counter/Encoder input connections 6-1

Counter Applications 6-2

Miscellaneous counter functions 6-15

7

Quick start guide to operation 7-1

Part 1: Acquisition and Analysis 7-1

Where to Start? 7-1

Set the Data File Name 7-16

Set the Sample Rate 7-19

Save Your Setup 7-20

Using the Acquisition Screens 7-21

Reloading your Data Files 7-26

Using the Cursors 7-29

Print Out Your Data 7-31

Export Your Data 7-33

Modify the Screens 7-34

| v

Use the hardware STORE and STOP buttons 7-35

Part 2 - Projects and Global settings 7-37

What is a Dewesoft Project? 7-37

Global Setup 7-60

Summary 7-62

8

Power Related Accessories 8-1

DPS-2410 external AC/DC power supply 8-1

DPS-2410 Dimensions 8-1

Neutrino-4 8-2

DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO 8-3

MSI Compatibility chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

9

Options and Interfaces 9-1

MSI series interfaces 9-1

Adapters 9-2

Using Adapters in DEWESoft 9-4

10 Signal Conditioners

10-1

DAQ Series Modules 10-1

DAQ Module Connectors 10-1

DAQP-HV (and -S3) Isolated High Voltage module (300/700 kHz) 10-10

DAQP-DMM Isolated High Voltage Module (20/30 kHz) 10-12

DAQP-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module (300 kHz) 10-14

DAQP-V Isolated Low Voltage Module (50 kHz) 10-18

DAQP-LA and LA-SC Isolated Current Module 10-20

DAQP-STG Isolated Universal Input Module 10-22

DAQP-BRIDGE-A Isolated Strain Gage Module 10-30

DAQP-BRIDGE-B Strain Gage Module 10-34

DAQP-CFB Carrier Frequency/LVDT module 10-38

DAQP-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module 10-42

DAQP-CHARGE-A Charge/IEPE module 10-44

DAQP-CHARGE-B Isolated Static/Dynamic Charge module 10-46

vi |

DAQP-THERM Isolated Thermocouple module 10-48

DAQP-MULTI Isolated Multifunction module 10-50

DAQP-FREQ-A Frequency to Voltage module 10-56

DAQN-V-OUT Isolated Voltage Output module 10-58

PAD Series Modules 10-61

PAD Series Common Information 10-61

General PAD module specifications 10-61

PAD Module Connectors 10-62

RS-232/485 interface 10-62

PAD Modules Table 10-63

PAD-V8-P Isolated 8-channel Voltage module 10-68

PAD-TH8-P Isolated 8-channel Temperature module 10-70

PAD-DO7 Isolated 7-channel Relay Output module 10-72

PAD-AO1 Isolated 1-channel Analog Output module 10-74

MDAQ Series Modules 10-77

MDAQ Series Common Information 10-77

General MDAQ module specifications 10-77

MDAQ-BASE-5 Mother Board 10-78

MDAQ-SUB-STG 8-channel Strain Gage/Bridge module 10-80

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 8-channel Bridge module 10-86

MDAQ-SUB-V200 Differential Voltage Input module 10-90

MDAQ-SUB-ACC IEPE Accelerometer module 10-94

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module 10-96

MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx Filter card 10-98

MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx Filter card 10-99

EPAD2 and CPAD2 series Modules 10-101

EPAD2 and CPAD2 overview 10-101 xPAD2 Series Calibration Information 10-101

Cross-reference of EPAD2 / CPAD2 modules 10-102

EPAD2-TH8-X and CPAD2-TH8-X 10-104

EPAD2-V8-X and CPAD2-V8-X 10-106

EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8 10-108

EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8 10-110

EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8 10-112

ORION Overview 10-114

11 A/D Cards

11-1

ORION series Cards 11-1

ORION cards cross-reference 11-1

ORION card implementation notes 11-2

ORION-0424-200 11-4

ORION-0824-200 11-5

ORION-1624-200 11-6

ORION-1622-100 and ORION-3222-100 11-7

ORION-0816-1000 11-8

ORION-1616-100 and ORION-3216-100 11-9

AD series Cards 11-11

AD cards Cross-reference 11-11

12 Interface Cards

12-1

IRIG-CLOCK time code interface card 12-1

Connect the IRIG signal 12-2

Configure the software 12-2

IRIG-CLOCK basic specifications 12-4

GPS-CLOCK time code interface card 12-5

Connect the antenna 12-5

Configure the software for TIMING 12-6

Mounting the GPS antenna 12-6

Warm-Up time 12-7

GPS-CLOCK Notes 12-7

GPS time display 12-9

Additionally recording speed, position, distance 12-9

Configure the software for GPS 12-9

GPS-CLOCK basic specifications 12-11

VIDEO-FG-4 interface card 12-12

Image Acquisition 12-12

| vii

viii |

ARINC-429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces 12-15

ARINC 429 receive setup 12-16

ARINC 429 transmit setup 12-17

MIL-STD-1553 receive setup 12-18

MIL-STD-1553 transmit setup 12-19

Storing ARINC/1553 data 12-19

Processing ARINC/1553 data in MATH 12-19

CAN BUS interfaces 12-20

Setting up your channels 12-21

Configuring message and channels manually 12-23

Arbitration IDs and CAN message rates 12-24

J1939 support 12-24

OBD II support 12-25

Select messages / channels for storage 12-25

Saving DBC files 12-26

Displaying CAN channels 12-26

Storing CAN data 12-27

Processing CAN data in MATH 12-27

Appendix

A-i

Index A-i

Documentation about your system: A-vii

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 1, INTRODUCTION | 1-1

1

Introduction

The DEWE-3000 series from Dewetron, Inc. are PCbased data acquisition instruments.

DEWE-3000 series instruments are a unqiue combination of a state-of-the-art computer which has been ruggedized for field applications in industrial applications, plus a signal conditioning front-end system for interfacing with sensors and interfaces, an A/D card for digitizing the conditioned signals, and powerful data acquisition software that allows you to set up and initiate data acquisition, as well as to analyze data that has been replayed.

Support

DEWETRON has a team of people ready to assist you if you have any questions or any technical difficulties regarding the system. For any support please contact your local distributor first or DEWETRON directly.

For North and south America, please contact:

Dewetron, Inc.

10 High Street, Suite K Wakefield, RI 02879 U.S.A.

Tel: +1 401-284-3750 Fax: +1 401-284-3755 [email protected]

www.dewamerica.com

Training

DEWETRON offers training at various offices around the world several times each year. DEWETRON headquaters in Austria have a very large and professional conference and seminar center, where training classes are conducted on a regular basis starting with sensors and signal conditioning, A/D technology and software operation. For more information about training services, please visit: http://www.dewetron.com/ support/training

Dewetron Inc. in the USA also has a dedicated training facility connected to its headquarters, located in Rhode

Island. For more information about training services in the US, please visit: http://www.dewamerica.com/support/training

For Asia and Europe, please contact:

Dewetron Ges.m.b.H.

Parkring 4 A-8074 Graz-Grambach AUSTRIA

Tel.: +43 316 3070

Fax: +43 316 307090 [email protected] http://www.dewetron.com

1-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Calibration

Every measuring instrument should be calibrated at regular intervals. The norm across nearly every industry is annual calibration, although this can vary according to the industry, environment, government regulations, and other regulations.

Before your Dewetron data acquisition system is delivered, it is calibrated at our factory in the USA.

Dewetron utilizes a NIST traceable metrology system based on the Fluke 5500 series calibrator and other industry leading instruments. We have created numerous Met/CAL® procedures and specialized calibration hardware and software to allow the automation of calibration check and adjustment of nearly every signal conditioner and A/D card that we manufacture. These procedures are proprietary to Dewetron, although they are available for purchase. Customers who have the same Fluke hardware can use them to similarly automate their calibration of Dewetron instruments.

Calibration services are available directly from

Dewetron, on whatever frequency you require. We do not subcontract calibration services, and perform it ourselves in house.

Contact Dewetron for further information about calibration services and calibration equipment that is available for purchase.

„

„

„

Models Covered

This owner’s guide covers the following model(s):

DEWE-3210 (DAQ modules version)

DEWE-3211 (MDAQ modules version)

DEWE-3213 (DEWE-43 input version)

„

„

„

„

„

„

What’s in this Guide

This guide is intended to serve as the top level reference document for the models listed above.

As such, it contains the following key information:

Support and calibration contact info

Safety precautions

System overview and block diagram

Overview of all models

Detailed specs for each model

Quick start guide operation

And what is not in this guide:

As a top-level reference, This manual is not meant to replace the comprehence reference manuals related to Dewetron sensors, signal conditioners,

A/D cards, interfaces, and software.

Please see those manuals for complete details.

Certificate included

Each system is delivered with a certificate of compliance with our published specifications.

However, if you require a traceable calibration certification with data, calibration reports are available for purchase with each order. We retain them for at least one year, so calibration reports can be purchased after your system was delivered.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 2, sAFETy PRECAUTIONs | 2-1

2

safety precautions

Use this system under the terms of the specifications only to avoid any possible danger. Maintenance should be performed by qualified personnel only.

Your safety is our primary concern! Please be safe at all times.

♦

♦

GENERAl sAFETy AND hAzARD WARNINGs FOR

All DEWETRON sysTEms:

During the use of the system, it might be possible to interact with non-Dewetron systems. Please read and follow the safety instructions provided in the manuals of all other components regarding warning and security advices for using the system.

symbols used in this manual:

♦

With this product, only use the power cable delivered or defined for the host country.

♦

Do not connect or disconnect sensors, probes or test leads, as these parts are connected to a voltage supply unit.

♦

Indicates hazardous voltages

WARNiNG

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or condition that could cause bodily injury or death.

The system is grounded via a protective conductor in the power supply cord. To avoid electric shocks, the protective conductor must be connected with the ground of the power network. Before connecting the input or output connectors of the system, make sure that there is a proper grounding to guarantee potential free usage. For countries, in which there is no proper grounding, please refere to your local legally safety regulations for safety use.

♦

CAUTiON DC systems: Every DC system has a grounding connected to the chassis (yellow/green safety banana plug).

Calls attention to a procedure, practice, or condition that could possibly cause damage to equipment or permanent loss of data.

⇒

These notices are sometimes indicated in this graphical motif.

♦

Please note the characteristics and indicators on the system to avoid fire or electric shocks. Before connecting the system, please carefully read the corresponding specifications in the product manual.

The inputs are not, unless otherwise noted (CATx identification), for connecting to the main circuit of category II,

III and IV.

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service, and repair of this product. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the product. DEWETRON Elektronische messgeraete

Ges.m.b.h. assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

♦

♦

♦

♦

The power cord separates the system from the power supply. Do not block the power cord, since it has to be accessible for the users.

Do not use the system if equipment covers or shields are removed.

If you assume the system is damaged, get it examined by authorized personnel only.

Any use in wet rooms, outdoors or in adverse environmental condition is not allowed! Adverse environmental

♦

2-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

conditions are: moisture or high humidity, dust, flammable gases, fumes or storms. et al.

The measurement category can be adjusted depending on module configuration.

Any direct voltage output is protected with a fuse against short cut and reverse-polarity, but is not galvanically isolated (except when explicitly marked on the system).

The system must be connected and operated to a properly grounded wall socket at the AC mains power supply only

(except for DC systems).

Any other use than described above may damage your system and is attended with dangers like shortcut, fire or electric shocks.

The whole system must not be changed, rebuilt or opened

(except for changing DAQP, HSI, PAD, CPAD2, and EPAD2 modules).

If you believe for any reason that the system cannot be used without risk, the system must be rendered inoperative and should be protected against inadvertant operation. You should assume that riskless operation is not possible if the system is: visibly damaged; emits unusual noises, smoke, or flames; if it does not function anymore; if the system has been exposed to long storage in adverse environmental conditions; if the system has been exposed to heavy stresses.

Do not touch any exposed connectors or components if they are carrying voltage and/or current. The use of noninsulated wires with the system is never allowed. There is a risk of short circuit and fire hazard.

Warranty void if damages caused by disregarding this manual. For consequential damages NO liability will be assumed!

Warranty void if damages to property or persons caused by improper use or disregarding the safety instructions.

Unauthorized changing or rebuilding the system is prohibited due to safety and permission reasons (CE). Exception: changing modules like DAQ, DAQP or PAD.

The assembly of the system is equivalent to protection class I. For power supply, only the correct power socket of the public power supply must be used, except the system is DC powered.

Be careful with voltages >25 VAC or >35 VDC! These voltages are already high enough in order to get a dangerous electric shock by touching the wiring.

The system heats up during operation. Make sure there is adequate ventilation. Ventilation slots must not covered!

Only fuses of the specified type and nominal current may be used. The use of patched fuses is prohibited.

Prevent using metal bare wires! Risk of short cut and fire

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

♦

hazard!

DO NOT use the system before, during or shortly after a thunderstorm (risk of lightning and high energy overvoltage). An advanced range of application under certain conditions is allowed with therefore designed products only. For details please refer to the specifications.

Make sure that your hands, shoes, clothes, the floor, the system or measuring leads, integrated curcuits and so on, are dry.

DO NOT use the system in rooms with flammable gases, fumes or dust or in adverse environmental conditions.

Avoid operation in the immediate vicinity of high magnetic or electromagnetic fields transmitting antennas or highfrequency generators

For exact values please refere to enclosed specifications.

Use measurement leads or measurement accessories aligned to the specification of the system only. Fire hazard in case of overload!

Do not switch on the system after transporting it from a cold into a warm room and vice versa. The thereby created condensation may damage your system. Acclimate the unpowered system to room temperature.

Do not disassemble the system! There is a high risk of getting a perilous electric shock. Capacitors may still be charged, even the system has been disconnected from the power supply.

The electrical installations and equipments in industrial facilities must be observed by the security regulations and insurance institutions.

The use of the measuring system in schools and other training facilities must be observerd by skilled personnel.

The measuring systems are not designed for use on human beings or animals.

Please contact a professional if you have doubts about the method of operation, safety or the connection of the system.

Please be careful with the product. Shocks, hits and dropping it from even low levels may damage the batteries, or the whole system. For exact values please refere to enclosed specifications.

Please also consider the detailed technical reference manual as well as the security advices of the connected systems.

This product has left the factory in safety-related proper condition. In order to maintain this condition and guarantee safety use, the user must observe the security advice, protocols, and warnings in this manual.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 2, sAFETy PRECAUTIONs | 2-3

BIOS notification:

The system BIOS is protected by password. Any change in the BIOS may cause a system crash. When the system is booting, do not press ESC-button on keyboard.

This may clear the BIOS settings and cause system faults.

Any change in the file structure as deleting or adding files or directories might cause a system crash.

Before installing software updates contact Dewetron or your local distributor. Use only software packages which are released by DEWETRON. Further informations are also available in the internet (http://www.

dewetron.com).

After power off the system wait at least 10 seconds before switching the system on again. Otherwise the system may not boot correct. This prolongs also the life of all system components.

System and Components Recycling

Production of these components required the extraction and use of natural resources. The substances contained in the system could be harmful to your health and to the environment if the system is improperly handled at it’s end of life!

Please recycle this product in an appropriate way to avoid an unnecessary pollution of the environment and to keep natural resources.

This symbol indicates that this system complies with the European Union’s requirements according to Directive

2002/96/EC on waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). Please find further informations about recycling on the

DEWETRON web site www.dewetron.com

Restriction of Hazardous Substances

This product has been classified as Monitoring and

Control equipment, and is outside the scope of the

2002/95/EC RoHS Directive. This product is known to contain lead.

Windows updates and antivirus/security software

♦

Before installing Windows software updates consult with

Dewetron for compatibility guidance. Please also keep in mind that the use of any antivirus or other security software may slow down your system and may cause data loss.

Problematic network stacks

♦

Often intrusive IT software or network processes can interfere with the primary function of the Dewetron system: to record data. Therefore we recommend strongly against the installation of IT/MIS software and running their processes on any Dewetron data acquisition system, and cannot guarantee the performance of our systems if they are so configured.

Product End-of-Life Handling

Observe the following guidelines when recycling a

Dewetron system:

2-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Model DEWE-3211 with MDAQ-SUB-

BNC/DSUB module

Left side, screen closed

Model DEWE-3213

Top cover, screen open

Model DEWE-3210 with 8 DAQ modules

Left side, screen open

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 3, sPECIFICATIONs | 3-1

3

DEWE-3210 series specifications

ANALOG INPUT SPECIFICATIONS

Parameter

Max on-board dynamic input channels

Compatible modules

Module configuration

Modularity

Input configuration

DEWE-3210 model

8

All DAQ, PAD, and HSI series plug-in signal conditioning modules

Any combination of 8 DAQ,

PAD, and HSI modules can be plugged in at any time.

(See DAQ, PAD, and HSI tables)

DAQ, PAD, and HSI modules can be plugged / unplugged from the system by the user, even when the system is powered on. These modules can be changed freely.

Differential, isolated (See

DAQ, PAD, and HSI tables)

Signal / Sensor compatibility Voltages, currents, strain, pressure, acceleration, sound pressure, temperature, force, displacement, and more.

DAQ, PAD and HSI modules are available which are compatible with virtually all sensors in common use today.

DEWE-3211 model

16

All MDAQ series modules

One MDAQ-BASE-5 holds any two MDAQ-SUB modules

(See MDAQ table)

MDAQ modules are factory installed only

DEWE-3213 model

8

DEWE-43 is built in

DEWE-43 is built in

DEWE-43 is built in

Differential, not isolated (See

MDAQ tables)

Voltages, currents, strain, pressure, acceleration, sound pressure, temperature, force, displacement, and more.

MDAQ modules (when combined with MSI adapters) are available which are compatible with virtually all sensors in common use today.

Differential, not isolated

(See DEWE-43 info)

Natively handles full bridge gages, and voltages up to ±10V. When MSI-BR series adapters are added, inputs can handle higher voltages, currents, 1/4 and

1/2 bridge sensors, charge and IEPE accelerometers, thermocouples, RTDs, and more.

See DEWE-43 information Detailed input specifications According to the installed signal conditioners and installed

A/D cards

(see tables for DAQ, MDAQ, PAD, HSI, EPAD2, CPAD2 conditioners, and ORION and AD series A/D cards)

Max A/D cards installable 3 3

Channel expansion, internal Block of 16 MDAQ channels can be installed permanently to the bottom of the DEWE-3210/3211. This block also provides

4 more battery slots for longer running times.

DEWE-43 is built in

N/A

3-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

COUNTER/ENCODER SPECIFICATIONS

Parameter

Number of counter channels

Counter modes

Counter input signal level

Counter input connectors

Number of Digital input/outputs

Digital input signal level

Digital input connector

DEWE-3210 series DEWE-3211 series

According to the A/D card installed (see tables)

ORION cards: Event counting, waveform timing, encoder, tacho, geartooth sensor

AD series cards: Event counting, waveform timing, tacho

Standard: TTL level Standard: TTL level

Optional: user adjustable trigger level (when ORION cards whose model names end in 4 or 5 are ordered.

See A/D card tables)

Standard: Two LEMO connectors on the left side panel, one for each counter input

Optional: More LEMO connectors, or alternative connectors, for the counters

According to the A/D card installed (see tables)

DEWE-3213 series

8

Standard: Eight LEMO connectors

24 digital inputs

TTL level, non-isolated Standard: TTL, non-isolated

Optional: Wider range, isolated digital input

According to the A/D card installed (see tables)

DSUB37 connector on the left side panel, which has the digital I/O lines, counter, and trigger line from the first installed A/D card.

Each of the 8 LEMOs has three digital inputs

CAN BUS SPECIFICATIONS

Parameter

Number of CAN bus interfaces

Interface type

Special protocols supported

Isolation

DEWE-3210 series DEWE-3211 series

According to the A/D card installed (see tables below)

DEWE-3213 series

2 x high speed CAN ports

CAN 2.0B, up to 1 MBit/sec

J1939 (standard)

OBDII PLUGIN-OBDII option)

CAN output (DEWESoft-OPT-CAN option) not isolated, however, CAN-OPT-ISO adapters are available optionally, which will isolated the CAN BUS interfaces.

ADDITIONAL INTERFACES

Parameter

EPAD2 interface

Video camera interfaces

GPS interfaces

ARINC 429 / 1553

DEWE-3210 series DEWE-3211 series

Standard, via LEMO connector. See signal conditioner tables below for EPAD2 details.

DEWE-3213 series

Use CPAD2 modules with either or both standard

CAN bus ports

Firewire (IEEE-1394), USB 2.0, and ethernet may be used for optional VIDEO camera sensors

RS232C and USB 2.0 may be used for optional GPS interfaces/sensors

Optional ARINC 429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces may be added either as PCI cards or as external USB 2.0 or ethernet-connected boxes.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 3, sPECIFICATIONs | 3-3

COMPUTER SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

Parameter

CPU

RAM

Hard disk drive

Operating System

Keyboard and pointing device

Display

Interfaces

PCI slots

Power system

Battery running time

AC running time

Dimensions:

Weight:

Temperature & humidity

Shock and vibration

DEWE-3210 series DEWE-3211 series

Intel® Core2Duo® 2 GHz CPU

DEWE-3213 series

2 GB RAM standard (up to 4 GB optionally)

500 GB removable S-ATA spinning drive standard, plus internal 160 GB fixed drive for Windows OS and applications

Optional drives:

32, 64, or 128 GB removable flash drive (no moving parts)

Internal spinning or flash drive added in addition to the removable drive

Larger removable drive (up to 1 TB)

Microsoft® Windows 7 Professional® (32-bit)

Built-in Cherry brand QWERTY keyboard with touchpad

Built-in 17” XGA display 1280x1024 pixels, with resistive touchscreen as stanard

2 x Ethernet interfaces (1 Gb/s max. transfer speed)

4 x USB 2.0 interfaces

1 x IEEE-1394 Firewire interface

1 x RS232C serial interface

1 x VGA interface

Audio and video I/O connectors

Three half-length 32-bit PCI slots. The first slot always used by an A/D card. The other slots may be used for additional A/D cards, or additional interfaces.

One half length PCI slot available for additional cards, interfaces, etc.

SideHAND® battery power system installed

2 x Lithium Ion smart batteries are included

Three battery slots are built into the left side panel

DPS-2410 external AC/DC adapter/charger is included

Built-in 2 line LCD display shows the battery status at all times

Approximately 2 hours of battery operation (depends on workload of the system)

Unlimited. With the DPS-2410 connected, the system will run indefinitely. Batteries are recharged automatically when power is connected.

425 x 340 x 191 mm (16.7 x 13.4 x 7.5 in.) (with screen closed)

Without batteries: 10 kg (22 lb.)

Battery weight: approx. 1.5 lbs each

0 to +50 °C (-20 when pre-warmed) (10 to 80 % non cond., 5 to 95 % rel. humidity)

Shock: EN 60068-2-27, MIL-STD-810F

Vibration: EN 60068-2-6, EN 60721-3-2 class 2M2

ACCESSORIES INCLUDED

Carrying bag

System restore DVD

3200-BAG, soft sided carrying bag made from ballistic nylon, black.

Pouches for accessories, cords, DPS-2410, straps and adjustable shoulder strap

DVD allows the system to be reloaded to factory conditions, including Windows configuration and Dewetron software configuration

3-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Data Acquisition Software Specifications

DEWESoft software specifications

General

Compatibility

Computer requirements

Licensing requirements

Software name and edition

Hardware compatibility

TEDS

Input scaling

Counter setup

Microsoft® Windows XP® and Windows 7® (32-bit operating systems)

Recommended: Intel® Core2Duo® 2 GHz CPU with 2 GB RAM and S-ATA HDD with 100 GB of free space

Minimum: Intel® Atom® 1.2 GHz CPU with 1 GB RAM and IDE HDD with 50 GB of free space

A valid license is required for data acquisition operation

No license is required to use the software in analysis mode

DEWESoft 7 SE (standard edition) is included with the DEWE-321x system.

Upgrades from SE to PROF or DSA or EE editions are available for purchase at any time.

Controls all programmable aspects of the integrated DEWE-43 acquisition module

Supports TEDS sensors, and includes TEDS compatible sensor database

Channel setup screen: supports linear scaling of analog channels via 2-point method and funtional method (y=mx+b)

Math formula and sensor database: support both linear and non-linear (polynomial) scaling, via multi-sectional coefficients or look-up table scaling

Counter/encoder channel setup screen supports graphical configuration of all counter and encoder decoding modes.

Recording setup

Recording modes

Pre-trigger time

Post-trigger time

File naming

File protection

Multi-file naming

Always fast (continuous recording to disk at the dynamic sample rate)

Fast on trigger (dynamic sample rate recording when one or more trigger conditions are true)

Always slow (reduced rate storage of min/max/ave/rms values at a user-selectable decimation of the dynamic sample rate

Fast on trigger, slow otherwise (combination of fast triggering and slow recording in between triggers)

Pre-trigger time can be entered when using any triggered recording mode. Pretrigger time limited to the amount of physical RAM available divided by the number of samples per second being streamed across the PCI bus

Post-trigger time may be selected without limit

When one or more channels are being used to stop recording, any selected posttrigger time will be added to the end of the acquisition

Data files may be named freely within Windows file naming constraints

Files canno be over-written accidentally due to a warning screen, which provides a way to cancel recording, continue and overwrite the existing file, or rename the new file (preserving the existing file)

Selectable automatic numbering of files. Software will append an underscore and four digits to the end of the user-entered filename. Subsequent recordings are increased one digit at a time. Alternatively the date and/or time (hh:mm:ss) can be added to the filename.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 3, sPECIFICATIONs | 3-5

DEWESoft software specifications

Data file size

Setup files

Setup file format

Data file format

No restrictions, however we suggest to keep files to within 8 GB for your convenience

A setup file contains all hardware settings and all display settings that can be configured within the software. An unlimited number of setup files may be saved for easy loading and re-use any time in the future

XML data format is used with D7s extension or XML extension

Binary file with XML header portion containing the entire setup file, with D7d extension. A library DLL is available for adding Dewesoft 7 data file importation into any software program under your control. Several commercially available analysis programs have added direct reading of Dewesoft 7 data files in this way, including

Matlab®, Flexpro®, and nCode®.

Data display

Built-in screens

Screen design

Data display widgets (standard)

Data display widgets (optional)

Scope, Overview, Recorder, FFT, Video, Power

Every display screen can be modified by the user

Screens can be deleted, and new screens added

Subscreens may be added below main screens

Screens may be renamed and moved on the toolbar

Recorder (y/t strip chart) graph, horizontal, up to 16 channels/graph

Recorder (strip chart) graph, vertical, 1 channels/graph

Scope y/t graph, up to 32 channels/graph

Digital meter with color coded alert levels, user programmable

Analog meter with color coded alert levels, user programmable

Bar graph, horizontal or vertical, with color coded alert levels, user programmable

X-Y graph, X-YYY or 4 x X-Y, linear or angle based X-Y modes supported

FFT graph, up to 4 channels/graph

2D array graph

3D array graph

Background image container

Video display container

GPS track display container, compatible with map background images

Discrete display, LED with color change, user programmable

Discrete display, Alphanumeric, user programmable messages based on discrete levels

Text container, user programmable

Line tool, for drawing connections from meters/graphs to other widgets

Vectorscope, harmonic FFT for voltage and current (included with DEWESoft-OPT-

POWER)

Third-octave display (included with DEWESoft-OPT-SNDLVL)

On-line and Off-line MATH

Function blocks included Formula editor: user-programmable arithmetic, algebra, trigonometry, boolean logic, measuring functions (time distance and ampltitude delta), and more.

Filtering: IIR, FIR, FFT, and Envelope

Integration, Double integration, Derivation and Double derivation (IIR filter module)

Polynomial / coefficient scaling (IIR filter module)

Basic statistics, array statistics, Latch math, counting functions, classification

Reference curves: Y/T, X/Y, and FFT

Constant function

3-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DEWESoft software specifications

Function blocks (continued)

Math channel operation modes

Exact frequency calculation

CA noise (included with DEWESoft-OPT-CA combustion analyzer)

Angle sensor (user definable angle-based sensor toolkit)

FFT, SFFT, CPB

Scope trigger math function

Strain gage rosette calculator

Math channels can be created before or after recording

Math channels created before recording may be set to not process until after recording, or may be set to process during recording

Math functions created after recording can be processed on a subset of the data, or all of the data

New channels resulting from math channels are saved to the data file, both before and after recording

On-screen analysis capabilities

Cursor measurements

Data zoom in/out

Data replay

Replay speed and direction

Data export capabilities

Export file formats available

Recorder graphs have selectable cursors which can be used to take precise measurements anywhere within the data, or any channels

Delta ampltidue and delta time are calculated, displayed, and printable

Cursors can be locked individually

Graph may still be zoomed/unzoomed when cursors are locked

Cursors and their readings appear on the paper when screen is printed

Any recorder graph can be used to zoom the data in or out, as many times as necessary

Data can be replayed to make it look like it did when recording

Replay can be increased or decreased in speed up to 8000x

Replay can be forward or reverse

Export selection

Export channel selection

Export mode

Matlab®, Flexpro, Excel®, delimited ASCII text

Diadem®, Universal 58, FAMOS®, nsoft time series, Sony log, RPC III, Comtrade®,

ATI®, Technical Data Management TDM, Impression Diadem®, Standard Data File,

WFT, Replay RPL, Wave (audio wav), Google Earth® KML

The area zoomed using the cursors will be exported.

If no zooming has been done, the entire data file will be exported

Any combination of channels may be exported, from 1 to all

Data may be exported at the full acquisition rate, or at the reduced storage rate.

When reduced is chosen, user may select to export up to four columns per channel: min, max, ave, rms

User selectable absolute time, relative time, or trigger (zero) time Export timebase

Software licensing and distribution

Acquisition mode

Analysis mode

A valid DEWESoft license is required to RECORD (acquire) data

No license is required to use DEWESoft to analyze data

DEWESoft may be given to third parties for installation and use to analyze data files

Off line math, zooming, printing, and data export are all supported

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 3, sPECIFICATIONs | 3-7

DEWESoft software specifications

Input sensor types supported

Analog sensors

Digital inputs

Video sensors

Sound sensors

GPS sensors

Inertial sensors

Virtually all analog type sensors are supported (see Conditioners section for compatibility details), abbreviated list:

Strain gages, accelerometers, microphones, RTDs, thermocouples, load cells, force sensors, voltages, currents, string potentiometers, LVDTs, resistive sensors

Digital I/O “discrete” lines, position encoders, tachometers, frequency meters

USB and Firewire webcams which support DirectShow/DirectX under Windows7®

Gig-E ethernet video camera (DEWE-CAM-GIG-E-50 option)

Synchronized Firewire camera (DEWE-CAM-01 option)

NSTC and PAL video streams (VIDEO-FG-4 option)

IEPE and charge type microphones (see analog sensors)

Compatible with:

DEWE-VGPS-200C, NMEA compatible GPS stream, Leane V-SAT®, Racelogic

VBOX II® GPS, Javad® GPS, Microsat® GPS

Compatible with:

XSENS MTI® and MTI-G® series MEMS based sensors (requires PLUGIN-XSENS software option)

Genesys ADMA® series gyro / GPS platforms (requires PLUGIN-ADMA software option)

BUS interfaces supported

CAN BUS

ARINC 429

MIL-STD-1553

PCM data

CAN 2.0B, with several additional protocols, including J1939 and OBD II (optional interface and software option DEWESoft-OPT-CAN)

Importation of Vector DBC files is included with this option

Note: CAN output is available via option DEWESoft-OPT-CAN-OUT)

This option also includes a Vector license for the export of Vector DBC files

Hardware supported:

All Dewetron CAN hardware, Softing® CAN PCI and USB, Vector® CAN, National

Instruments® PCI-CAN/2 card

Internal half-length PCI card and external USB ARINC 429 interfaces optionally available.

Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553

Internal half-length PCI card and external USB ARINC 429 interfaces optionally available.

Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553

Internal full-length PCI format bit-sync/decom interface optionally available

Requires also DEWESoft-OPT-PCM

Requires a model with a full length PCI slot available, or external expansion chassis with PCI slot(s).

3-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

System Dimensions

334

340

6

350

Dimensions in millimeters (mm)

Divide by 25.4 for inches

420

(REAR PANEL)

164

6

8

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 3, sPECIFICATIONs | 3-9

Top-level call-outs

DEWE-321x, head on view, with the screen open

17” XGA display and resistive TOUCHSCREEN

Left speaker grille

Right speaker grille

Power and

STORE/STOP buttons

QWERTY keyboard

Screen release buttons (slide inward to release)

Rubber corners on all sides

Touchpad and mouse buttons

Screen release buttons (slide inward to release)

Filtered air intakes

(2 fans)

Carrying handle

POWER switch and LED

HDD busy LED

Battery status LCD

Storing indicator LED

STORE / STOP buttons *

QWERTY keyboard

* STORE/STOP buttons may not be

present in all models

3-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

2 U

Configuration guide, DEWE-3211 model

The DEWE-3211 has a 2U height space on its left side panel, which can accept either a 2U high MDAQ panel, such as either the DSUB connector panel or half BNC/half DSUB9 panel ... or a 1.5U panel plus any of the 0.5U accessory panels, as shown below:

MDAQ panels

Accessory panels

0.5U-AMPFLEX-POWER-4

0.5 U

0.5U-AMPFLEX-POWER-8

0.5 U

Power supply for PNA-A100 current clamps

0.5U-AOUT-BNC-2

0.5 U

1U-AOUT-BNC-4

2 U

1.5 U

MDAQ panel with BNC connectors is only 1.5U, leaving 0.5U above for any accessory panel

2 U

Note - if your system is ordered with any 1.5U MDAQ panel (MDAQ-SUB-V200-BNC or MDAQ-SUB-ACC-BNC are perfect examples), and you do not order a 0.5U accessory panel, we will install a blank panel in the 0.5U space.

Configuration guide, DEWE-3210 model

The DEWE-3210 has a fixed configuration: there is a RACK-8 built into the side panel, so all you need to do is choose any any of our DAQ, PAD, or HSI series plug-in modules to fill the slots.

Both models accept optional EPAD2 series external PAD modules for adding many channels of slower temperature signals, voltage, current, and RTD inputs.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 4, sysTEm CONNECTORs | 4-1

4

system Connectors

System/PC connectors

Ground (earth) Connector

Connector: insulated banana jack, marked with the ground/earth symbol, yellow with green stripe

Mating connector: insulated banana plug, yellow with green stripe

Function: Depending on your electrical environment, it may be necessary to give the system an additional ground connection. This is an international standard mini-banana jack, color coded yellow/green, located near the DC power input.

DC Power Input

KEY PIN: (+)

LOW PIN: (–)

LEMO connector

EGJ-2B-302-CLA

DC power input

Connector: LEMO power connector, as shown in the picture above. The connector is this LEMO model: EGJ-2B-

302-CLA. The appropriate mating connector is LEMO FGJ.302.CLLD-XX (where XX is the cable size).

The mating cable called CBL-DPS-2410 is provided to connect the DEWE-3210 to the DPS-2410 power supply. This cable is 2 meters long. It has FGJ.302.CLLD-XX on the side that plugs into the DEWE-3210, and

FGG.2B.302-CLAD-XX on the side that plugs into the DPS-2410 AD/DC power supply.

Permissable power inputs are 18-24VDC.

⇒

important note - power input must not exceed 24vDC! System damage will occur.

4-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

RS232C interface

(com1)

PS/2 mouse (green)

IEEE-1394 firewire

Ethernet ports (3)

XGA video output PS/2 keyboard (violet) USB 2.0 ports (4) Audio stack

(see description for color codes)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 4, sysTEm CONNECTORs | 4-3

Fuse

The system DC power is fused using a REGULAR ATO 15A fast-acting blade fuse. Blue is the

ATO standard color code for a15 amperes fuse rating. ISO 8820-3:2002 standard.

⇒

Replace this fuse only with exactly the same type, or equipment damage, injury or even death can result.

Computer Connectors

The door on the right side of the chassis opens to allow access to a collection of computer interface connections, as follows:

RS232C interface connector (com1)

Connector: 9-pin DSUB (male)

Mating connector: 9-pin DSUB (female)

Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the RS232C serial interface.

The typical interpretation of the signals in the COM ports is as follows:

The connector pin-out is defined here:

4-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

PS/2 mouse (green) and PS/2 keyboard (violet)

Connectors: Standard PS/2 green (mouse) and violet (keyboard)

Mating connectors: Standard PS/2 keyboard and mouse plugs or USB-PS/2 adapters

Function: Attachment of a keyboard or PS/2 mouse adapter via the stacked PS/2 mouse and keyboard connector

(MSE & KBD).

Description: Both interfaces utilize open-drain signaling with on-board pull-up. The PS/2 mouse and keyboard is supplied from 5V_STB when in standby mode in order to enable keyboard or mouse activity to bring the system out from power saving states. The supply is provided through a 1.1A resetable fuse.

Above left: Stacked PS/2 connector pinning and call-outs

Above right: view of a typical PS/2 connector, showing the pin numbering schema

-

Note: PS/2 devices should be connected before the system is powered on. PS/2 mice in particular will typically not be recognized by Windows if connected after Windows has loaded.

iEEE-1394 Firewire interface

Connector: Standard 6-pin full size IEEE-1394b female connector

Mating connector: Standard 6-pin IEEE-1394b male plug

Function: Can be used to connect devices which utilize the IEEE-1394 firewire interface.

Description: This port is an IEEE Std 1394a-2000 fully compliant cable port which provides interfacing at 100M bits/s, 200M bits/s, and 400M bits/s.

| 4-5

-

Note: The DEWE-CAM-01 high speed video camera from Dewetron connects via firewire. However, it is highly recommended to add a dedicated firewire card to your system to get the best performance from the DEWE-CAM-01 sensor. The full speed may not be achievable using the on-board interface shown above.

Ethernet interfaces (3)

Connectors: RJ45 CAT5e standard jack

Mating connectors: RJ45 CAT5e or CAT6 plugs

Function: for connecting the DEWE-321x to a local area network (LAN), or for connecting ethernet peripherals

(printers, cameras, etc.).

Description: The DEWE-321x provides three channels of 10/100/1000Mb Ethernet RTL8111B LAN controllers.

In order to achieve the specified performance of the Ethernet port, Category 5 twisted pair cables must be used with 10/100MB and Category 5E, 6 or 6E with 1Gb LAN networks.

The signals for the Ethernet ports are as follows:

The pinout of the RJ45 connector is as follows:

4-6 |

Above right: typical mating plug, showing the pin outs

On top of Ethernet connectors there is a Green LED (to the left) turning on when a 100MHz connection is made and it is flashing when 100MHz traffic is ongoing. The Yellow LED (to the right) turns on when a 1GHz connection is made and it is flashing when traffic is ongoing.

Please refer to the CAT5e, CAT6, and structured cabling standards for computer networks when interfacing to the

DEWE-321x.

CRT/vGA video output

Connector: three-row 15-pin DE-15 (female) connector

Mating connector: 15-pin DE-15 video (male) plug

Function: For connecting an additional display to the DEWE-321x, which will show an exact duplicate of the built-in display.

Description: The DEWE-321x has two basic types of interfaces to a display: Analog CRT interface and a digital interface typically used with flat panels. The digital interface to flat panels is connected internally to the built-in flatpanel display. The CRT interface is available externally to the user.

⇒

Note: The 5v supply in the CRT connector is fused by a 1.1A resetable fuse.

| 4-7

-

-

Left: typical mating cable for connecting an external VGA/XGA monitor

Note: the CRT output cannot be used in a “multiple monitors” setup under Windows. To support multiple monitors with different images on them requires that a separate video card be added to the system.

Note: DEWE-321x’s with 15” displays (made in 2010) have a max resolution of 1024x768; DEWE-321x

(made in 2011 or later) with 17” displays have a max resolution of 1280x1024 . The CRT output is set to the same resolution as the built-in flatpanel display.

USB 2.0 interfaces (4)

Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle

Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug

Function: For the connection of peripheral devices which utilize the USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 interface.

Description: The DEWE-321x’s mainboard contains an Enhanced Host Controller Interface (EHCI) host controller that supports USB 2.0 allowing data transfers up to 480Mb/s. There are four user-accessible Universal Host

Controller Interface (UHCI Revision 1.1) controllers that support USB full-speed and low-speed signaling. All ports are high-speed, full-speed, and low-speed capable and USB Legacy mode is supported.

Over-current detection on all four USB ports is supported.

USB ports 0 and 2 are supplied on the combined ETHER1, USB0, USB2 connector. USB ports 4 and 5 are supplied on the combined IEEE1394_0, USB4, USB5 connector.

Note: It is recommended to use only High-/Full-Speed USB cable, specified in USB2.0 standard:

4-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

-

Note: USB is most often used to connect webcams for recording video in sync with the data in your Dewetron data acquisition system. it is also used to connect inertial sensors such as the XSENS MTi series of sensors.

Audio stack connectors (6)

Connectors: 3.5 mm (~1/8 in.) TRS jacks, color coded

Mating connectors: 3.5 mm (!1/8 in.) TRS plugs

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 4, sysTEm CONNECTORs | 4-9

Function: for outputting or inputting audio

Description: Audio Line-in, Line-out and Microphone are available in the stacked audio jack connector. Below is shown audio stack configuration when configured for 8-channel audio.

⇒

Note: Always use industry standard plugs and cables when connecting to any part of the DEWE-321x

Signal Input Connectors

Analog input connectors (8 or 16)

Connector: Varies according to the signal conditioning module(s) installed

See the signal conditioning tables for further details about the module(s) installed within your system.

Function: to input analog signals to the dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211.

4-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Above: typical DEWE-3210 showing 8 DAQ modules plugged in

Counter/encoder connectors (2)

Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating cable available: CTR-CABLE-05 (includes connector)

Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.

-

Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.

CAN BUS interface connector (installed when you order CAN BUS option)

Connectors: LEMO EGG.1B.306.CLL

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.306.CLL

Mating cable: CAN-CBL-Y

3

4

PIN Function

1

2

CAN0 Lo

CAN0 Hi

D GND

CAN1 Lo

Comment

First CAN port

First CAN port

Second CAN port

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 4, sysTEm CONNECTORs | 4-11

PIN Function

5 CAN1 Hi

Comment

Second CAN port

6 GND

Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have a CAN BUS output, such as Dewetron’s own CPAD2 series signal conditioning modules.

When the CAN option is installed, this single LEMO connector will contain two CAN BUS interfaces. The

CAN-CBL-Y mating cable is optionally available to split the single LEMO connector to two standard CAN DB-9

(female) connectors. Both DB-9 connectors are wired the same way, as shown below:

When you connect either CAN bus interface to your vehicle or other CAN network, it is necessary to add termination resistors (not included) at each end of the cable:

-

Note: this connector does not provide power for CPAD2 series modules.

Expansion connector (DEWE-3210 model)

ANALOG iNPUT connector

4-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Connector: LEMO 19-pin LEMO EGG.2B.319.CLL, marked ANALOG INPUT

Mating cable: 3210-EXP8-L

Function: The DEWE-3210 can be configured with a 16 channel A/D card inside. The first eight channels are wired to the DAQ modules on the left side panel. Therefore, the other eight channels are brought to this ANALOG

INPUT connector on the left side panel, whereby you may connect an expansion rack such as the DEWE-30-8, in order to address these eight channels.

DC Power & control cable

5

7

9

Pin

1

3

11

13

15

17

19

Signal

AI 8+

AI 9+

AI 10+

AI 11+

AI 12+

AI 13+

AI 14+

AI 15+

N.C.

N.C.

6

8

10

Pin

2

4

12

14

16

18

Signal

AI 8 GND

AI 9 GND

AI 10 GND

AI 11 GND

AI 12 GND

AI 13 GND

AI 14 GND

AI 15 GND

N.C.

The DEWE-30-8 expansion rack needs two connections to the DEWE-3210 mainframe:

1. The analog connection as shown above via the 3210-EXP8-L cable as shown above, and

2. POWER and MODULE CONTROL are carried to the DEWE-30-8 expansion rack via the EPAD connector.

Therefore, the additional modules in the expansion rack will be controllable within the software just as if the inputs were physically installed within the DEWE-3210 mainframe.

DEWE-30-8-EXPANSION Rack (Optional)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 5, OPERATION GUIDElINEs | 5-1

5

Operation Guidelines

System Startup Protocol

Installing the Smart Batteries

systems are shipped with the hot-swappable batteries removed. you should install them, connect power, and charge up the batteries. Please follow these guidelines:

♦

Open the battery door on side of DEWE-321x and insert one battery into the top slot, and the other into the bottom slot. Leave the center slot open unless you have a third battery!

♦

When inserting the first battery you may notice that the system LEDs and fans will turn on for a second, this is normal when the battery module “wakes up.”

⇒

Never use any battery which appears to be damaged, or which is cracked, broken, hot to the touch, or unusual in any way. Lithium batteries can be dangerous if mistreated or improperly charged.

Please locate the BATTERy sTATUs lCD, located on the panel just above the keyboard.

♦

With batteries in place, the LCD screen will display the charge level, charge/discharge state, power consumption and total current.

♦

The LCD (and battery module circuit) will always be ON, unless the batteries are removed

Please locate your DPs-2410 external power supply. This is included with each DEWE-321x system.

♦

Connect the included AC power cord to the DPS-

2410, and then to a 120VAC power receptable.

The battery door on the side of the DEWE-321x is hinged, allowing you to access the battery compartment. Batteries can be removed by pulling on their flexible tabs.

The battery status LCD keeps you informed of how many batteries are installed (2 above), the charge level (100% above), and whether the system is charging or discharging.

The DPS-2410 AC/DC converter/power supply is fused with an automotive type power fuse. Please replace only with the same type and rating of fuse.

5-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

♦

Connect the included DC power cord to the DPS-

2410 and then to the DEWE-3031’s DC power input jack.

♦

Turn on the DPS-2410 power switch. A power LED will confirm that that it is receiving AC power and operating properly.

⇒

-

Do not block the cooling fan of the DPS-2410!

Overheating any electrical component is dangerous.

NOTE: The DEWE-321x can be operated without batteries simply by connecting the DPS-2410.

-

This can also help you refresh batteries which have become 100% discharged, which can happen over time. if the mainframe will not start up, simply remove all of your batteries, then power up the system using the DPS-2410. When the system is up and running, insert only one battery into the top slot. Wait 30 minutes and then insert a second battery into the second slot.

For faster recharging, do NOT power up the DEWE-

3xxx mainframe, but make certain that the DPS-2410 is powered on.

-

There are also one, two, and four slot external battery chargers optionally available. For an easy to use desktop charger for a single battery, please order the BAT-CHARGER-1. For a more robust four battery charger which can also be used as a DC power source, choose the Neutrino-4.

The DPS-2410 has a POWER SWITCH - be sure to turn it on, otherwise, DC power will not flow from it.

Optional BAT-CHARGER-1 is ideal for desktop usage.

Optional NEUTRINO-4 is a ruggedized four battery charger that also serves as a

DC power supply

Using the smart batteries

The “smart batteries” supplied with your Dewetron battery powered system are equipped with an integrated circuit which stores information such as manufacturer, serial number, production date, etc., and monitors the current battery status in terms of discharge rate, predicted remaining capacity, temperature, voltage etc.

BATT-95WH “smart batteries” are capable of displaying their charge state even when not plugged into anything.

With the push of a button, an LED display on the battery pack shows the current charge state in 25%

Press the white dot on the battery and the charge percentage indicator will show the approximate remaining charge, in

25% steps.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 5, OPERATION GUIDElINEs | 5-3

steps. An intelligent battery controller, integrated in our DEWETRON systems, takes care of the charging and discharging process in order to ensure maximum battery performance and lifetime.

Turning on the System

Locate the power switch on the front panel above the main screen. This is a momentary rocker type switch, where the white dot indicates the ON direction.

♦

Press ON and hold for one second to power the system on.

♦

Press ON and hold for 3 seconds to power OFF.

♦

-

Green POWER LED: lit when the system is powered on

The LCD battery display is ALWAYS on when any batteries are installed. This does not indicate that the system is powered on! Only the green

POWER LED indicates system power on/off status.

Red HDD LED: lit when there is hard disk activity.

♦

You will notice that the main screen’s backlight will come on when power is applied. After a few moments the BIOS and Windows operating system messages and graphics will appear.

⇒

if the system does not power on, ensure that you have batteries with at least 30% charge, or that the DPS-2410 is properly connected and TURNED

ON.

The DEWE-321x power switch is a momentary type, located on the front panel near the LED battery status display. To its right are LEDs for system power (green) and HDD activity

(red).

Hardware Protocols

Using the removable hard disk drive

The right side of the DEWE-321x has a 2.5” removable drive bay. This single bay has two separate hard drives inside it: a C drive for Windows and applications, and a D drive for data.

5-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

⇒

if this is the only hard drive in the system, do

NOT remove it when the system is powered on!

This will cause Windows to crash very badly. if you have an internal hard drive which has the

Windows operating system, then removing the external drive is permitted when power is on, because you are not writing to it at that time.

To remove the hard drive, you must have access to the keylock. Turn the key into the lock and then press the large button beside the lock to eject the drive. To insert another drive, reverse these steps.

Using the Optical read/write drive

Directly above the removable HDD is an optical drive which can read and write many formats of DVD and CD media. Note that DVD and CD authoring tools which are standard within the installed Windows operating system are available. No additional authorizing tools are included as standard.

A standard slimline optical drive, you open it by pressing the single button on the drive door beside the LED.

Gently press-fit a compatible disk onto the spindle and then close the door.

If your system has Windows XP operating system installed, CD authoring software is built into Windows already. However, Windows XP does not include a DVD authoring utility, so you must purchase one separately

However, if your system has Windows 7 operating system installed, authoring capability for both CD and

DVD media are included with the operating system.

Of course, in all cases, you are free to install whatever authoring software you prefer. There are some very nice third party utilities which are superior to the ones built into Windows.

-

Windows 7 Professional, 32-bit mode, was installed on these models starting in December

2010.

The DEWE-321x right side panel contains the removable

HDD and the optical media drive as standard.

The optical drive is located above the computer access door.

Press the EJECT button to open the optical drive.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 6, CONNECTING yOUR sIGNAls | 6-1

6

Connecting your signals

Analog input connections

Because your DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 are compatible with so many different DAQ, MDAQ, PAD, EPAD, CPAD, and other

Dewetron modules, please refer to those signal conditioners in the Appendix for complete details about how to connect your signals to them.

Counter/Encoder input connections

The DEWE-321x is suited with synchronous 32-bit advanced counter and digital inputs. In addition to the basic counter function like simple event counting, up/down counting and gated event counting also period time, pulse width, two-edge separation, frequency and all encoder measurements are supported.

All counter inputs can also be used as digital inputs. In addition to the basic counter input selections, the ADC clock can also be used as counter source. The figure below shows the block diagram of the counter and input overvoltage protection.

1) Pull-up resistors 2) Over-voltage protection 3) Buffers

6-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Counter Applications

each counter block is equipped with three inputs. With this three inputs the following applications can be done:

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

Event Counting

Gated Event Counting

Up/Down Counter

Frequency Measurement

Period Time Measurement / Pulse Width Measurement

Two Pulse Edge Separation

Quadrature Encoder (X1, X2, X4, A-Up/B-Down)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 6, CONNECTING yOUR sIGNAls | 6-3

Event Counting

In Event Counting the counter counts the number of pulses that occur on counter source. At each sample clock the counter value is read without disturbing the counting process. The figure below shows an example of event counting where the counter counts eight events on Counter Source. The synchronized value is the value read at the sample clock (see the encircled numbers in the figure, e.g. (1), (2), (3)... ).

Event counting figure :

Software setup:

-

if counting the falling edges is necessary, the input signal can be inverted.

6-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Gated Event Counting

Gated Event Counting is similar to Event Counting except that the counting process is gated. When the counter gate is active, the counter counts pulses which occur at the counter source. When the counter gate is inactive the counter retains the current count value. At each sample clock interval the current value is read.

The figure below shows an example of gated event counting where the counter counts three events on the counter source. At (1) and (2) the counter value is zero, because the gate signal is inactive. At sample clock (3), (4) and

(5) the actual counter value is read out. At (6) the same value as at (5) is output.

Gated event counting figure:

Software setup:

-

if counting the falling edges is necessary, the input signal can be inverted.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 6, CONNECTING yOUR sIGNAls | 6-5

Up/Down Counter

The Up/Down Counter counts the rising edges on the counter source. The direction of the counting depends on the signal state on the counter aux pin. If counter aux is active (high level), the counter value increases; if counter aux is inactive (low level), the counter value decreases.

Up/Down counting figure:

Software setup:

6-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Period Time Measurement

In Period Time Measurement the counter uses the internal time base to measure the period time of the signal present on Counter Source. The counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base which occurs between two rising edges on Counter Source. At the completion of the period interval the counter value is stored in a register and the counter starts counting from zero. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (6)) the register value is read out.

Period time measurement figure:

Software setup:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 6, CONNECTING yOUR sIGNAls | 6-7

Pulse Width Measurement

In Pulse Width Measurement the counter uses the internal time base to measure the pulse width of the signal present on Counter Source. The counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base after a rising edge occurs on counter source. At the falling edge on Counter Source the counter value is stored in a reg- ister and the counter is set to zero. With the next rising edge on Counter Source the counter starts counting again. At every Sample

Clock ((1), (2), ... (6) ) the register value is read out.

Pulse width measurement figure:

Software setup:

-

Note: to measure the LOW time of the signal, invert the input.

6-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Two Pulse Edge Separation Measurement

The two pulse edge separation measurement is similar to the pulse width measurement, except that there are two input signals: Counter Start and Counter Stop. After a rising edge has occurred on Counter Start the counter counts rising edges of the internal time base. Additional edges on signal start are ignored. After a rising edge has occurred on Counter Stop the counter stops counting and the value is stored in a register. At the next rising edge on Counter Start the counter starts counting from zero again. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (6)) the register value is read out.

Two Pulse Edge Separation Measurement figure:

Software setup:

-

if the input signals are inverted, the falling edges will be used for counting.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 6, CONNECTING yOUR sIGNAls | 6-9

Motion Encoders

Motion encoders have usually three channels: channel A, B and Z. Channel A and channel B provide the square signals for the counter, and have a phase shift of 90°. From this phase shift the decoder is able to recognize the rotation direction of the motion encoder. The third channel outputs one pulse at a certain position at each revolution.

This pulse is used to set the counter to zero. The number of counts per cycle at a given motion encoder depends on the type of decoding: X1, X2, or X4. Some motion encoders have two outputs, which work in a different way.

Either channel A or channel B provides the square signal, depending on the direction of the rotation.

The next sections illustrate the basic encoder modes that are supported:

Quadrature Encoder

In the first case, X1 decoding is explained. When Input A leads Input B in a quadrature cycle, the counter increments on rising edges of Input A. When Input B leads Input A in a quadrature cycle, the counter decre- ments on the falling edges of Input A. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (9)) the counter value is read out.

Quadrature Encoder X1 Mode figure:

6-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

For X2 encoding the rising edges and the falling edges of Input A are used to increment or decrement. The counter increments if Input A leads Input B and decrements if Input B leads Input A.

Quadrature Encoder X2 Mode figure:

Similarly, the counter increments or decrements on each edge of Input A and Input B for X4 decoding. The condition for increment and decrement is the same as for X1 and X2.

Quadrature encoder X4 figure:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 6, CONNECTING yOUR sIGNAls | 6-11

The third channel Input Z, which is also referred as the index channel, causes the counter to be reloaded with zero in a specific phase of the quadrature cycle. The figure below shows the results for X1 encoding with input Z.

Quadrature Encoder with channel Z figure:

Software setup:

6-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

A-Up/B-Down Encoder

The A-Up/B-Down Encoder supports two inputs, A and B. A pulse on Input A increments the counter on its rising edges. A pulse on Input B decrements the counter on its rising edges. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (9)) the counter value is read out.

A-up/B-down Encoder figure:

Software setup:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 6, CONNECTING yOUR sIGNAls | 6-13

Frequency Measurement

In general it is possible to take the inverse of a period measurement to get the frequency of the input signal. If the period time measurement is done an inaccuracy of counted internal time base cycles of ±1 cycle ap- pears, because the counted cycles of the internal time base depends on the phase of the input signal with re- spect to the internal time base. For long period times, and therewith low frequencies, the measurement error is negligible.

At high frequencies, and therewith short period times, few cycles are counted. In this case the error of ±1 cycle becomes significant.

Accuracy at period time measurement figure:

For higher precision result the frequency measurement is done with two counters. In each case two counters are paired, i.e. it have to be used counter 0 and counter 1 or counter 2 and counter 3 or counter 4 and counter 5 or counter 6 and 7 for the frequency measurement. The first coun- ter counts the rising edges on Counter Source.

The second counter counts the rising edges of the internal time base. At every rising edge on Counter Source the counter value of the second counter is stored in a register. At every Sample Clock ((1), (2), ... (6)) the values of both counters are read out.

Frequency measurement figure:

With these both measurement results not only the frequency can be calculated in a precise way. Also the event counter result can be show in fractions because the exact time when the event occurs at the input is known. The event counting result is recalculated with interpolation to the exact sample point like shown in the diagram above.

In the next figure, the difference of the measurement result is shown. While a standard counter input shows the value up to one sample delayed, the counter input of the counter calculates the counter result at the exact sample

6-14 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

point:

-

For low frequency input signals the frequency also can be obtained by measure the period time and take its inverse without more inaccuracy.

Period, pulsewidth, and duty cycle

Software setup:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 6, CONNECTING yOUR sIGNAls | 6-15

Miscellaneous counter functions

Filters

Each counter input has a digital filter, which can be set to various gate times. If the gate time is set to “Off”, no filter is on the input signal. The purpose of filtering is to eliminate unstable states, e.g. glitches, chatter,et al, which may appear on the input signal. Noise can be mis-counted, and should therefore be eliminated.

The filter circuit samples the input signal on each rising edge of the internal time base. If the input signal maintains his state for at least the gate time, the new state is propagated. As an effect the signal transition is shifted by the gate time.

The figure demonstrates the function of the filter:

Below, input signal with chatter, before and after filtering:

The filter can be chosen between eight filter settings:

Off, 100 ns, 200 ns, 500 ns, 1 μs, 2 μs, 4 μs and 5 μs.

6-16 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Two examples of filter settings:

The 100 ns filter will pass all pulse widths (high and low) that are 100 ns or longer. It will block all pulse widths that are 75 ns or shorter. The 5 μs filter will pass all pulse widths (high and low) that are 5 μs or longer and will block all pulse widths that are 4.975 μs or shorter.

The internal sampling clock (time base) is 80 MHz, so the period time amounts 12.5 ns. Pulse widths be- tween gate time minus two internal time base period times may or may not pass, depending on the phase of the input signal with respect to the internal time base.

Properties of all filter settings:

Reset on start measure

Usually all counters are reset at the start of data acquisition, i.e., the counter value is set to zero at the start of data acquisition. In some applications this is not required. For example, an angle encoder is adjusted to the physical zero position at the beginning of a test procedure. By resetting the counter at every start of the measurement this adjustment will be lost. Without this reset the counter is also active if the acquisition is interrupted between the test cycles. As a result the counter types out the absolute angle position at the measurement output all the time.

Count Direction

As default setting the count direction is in up-counting mode. Every rising edge at the input will increase the counter value. The DEWE-ORION-1616-10x supports also down counting without the need of an additional input like in the up/down counting mode.

No new value available

Especially in every kind of input period time measurement mode (also pulse width or two pulse edge separation measurement) there may be new information between two samples. Also measuring the line frequency of about 50 Hz with a sample rate of 10 kSamples/sec means, that only after every 200th measurement new input frequency information is available. Another example is the measurement on rotating machines if the sensor output frequency is lower than the sample rate. Depending on the application you can choose between two different output data settings:

„

„

Repeat last value: last measured cycle time is taken until a new measured cycle time is available

Make zero value: as soon as no input information is available the output is set to zero

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-1

7

Quick start guide to operation

Using DEWESOFT data acquisition software to record and analyze data.

Part 1: Acquisition and Analysis

Where to Start?

Turn on your Dewetron system. When Windows is loaded, find the DEWESoft icon on the desktop. It looks like this:

Double-click it. When DEWESoft loads, it will be in the ACQUISITION mode by default, showing any existing

SETUP FILES that you have created. It should look like this:

The files might also look like icons. This is selectable near the top right corner of the window using these buttons:

7-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

You can load any setup file by simply double-clicking it from this page. But don’t do that yet: let’s make a new setup file. Before doing anything, we need to cover some questions that you might have already:

What kind of files are these?

These are SETUP files. In the ACQUISITION mode you create a system setup, which is used to record a DATA file.

Are these my data files?

No, these are not data files. You cannot see or load your data files in the ACQUISITION mode!

Why can’t I see my data files?

You can if you change to the ANALYSIS mode. But DEWESoft starts up in the ACQUISITION mode by default.

What is the difference between ACQUISITION and ANALYSIS modes? Why do I need them?

ACQUISITION - in this mode you set up the system and store (record) your data

ANALYSIS - in this mode you can see your stored data, print it out, export it, and analyze it further

Where is my data stored? How do I get to it?

It’s stored on the hard drive. And don’t worry, we will be loading and replaying captured data files in a few minutes!

Start with a Blank Setup

Click [Ch. Setup] in the ribbon:

When you do this, you will be on the ANALOG setup screen first. This is where you set up the analog inputs of your system. You might have other setup screens for DIGITAL, COUNTER, CAN, VIDEO and more inputs… but let’s focus on the analog inputs in this QuickStart. Notice that the Analog screen is highlighted in yellow when selected.

Below it you will see your channels. How this looks will vary according to which kinds of signal conditioners your system has, and how many channels. Here is a system with eight DAQ modules:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-3

Notice that DEWESoft automatically activates the first channel for you. You need to activate the ones that you want to store when you record data.

Each channel is shown on one row which has these fields: Slot, On/Off, (Color), Name, Amplifier, Physical Values,

CAL, and SETUP:

7-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Activate the Channels

All channels that are set to USED will be stored when you press STORE. It does not matter whether the channel is shown on the display screen or not! If it is activated here as USED, it will be stored. It is possible to activate a channel but not store it - this is an advanced feature not covered here.

To turn on more channels, simply press their [Unused] buttons, and they will change to [Used].

-

HiNT: to turn on (or off) all channels at once, click the top of the column and select from the menu that will appear:

“Select all” will turn ON all channels, while “Deselect all” will turn them all OFF.

Set Up Your Channels

The easiest and most direct way to configure a channel is to click the “Set ch. #” button all the way to the right:

To configure channel 0, for example, click the [Set ch. 0] button.

The channel setup dialog will appear. This is a critical screen to learn about, so let’s take a close look at what it does and how to use it.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-5

Channel Setup Dialog

This dialog seems complex at first, but it’s really quite simple once you understand what it contains and how to use it. There are four sections:

7-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

PART 1: signal conditioner hardware control (top-right quadrant)

It is best to configure this section first, because this actually controls the signal conditioning HARDWARE. In the example above, we have a DAQP-LV low voltage module, which has two basic input types: voltage and current.

Assuming we want to measure voltage, simply set the RANGE using the selector:

Now set the filter (if you have an MDAQ system, you may or may not have the filter option). Different signal conditioners have different settings, so please refer to the details about them. In this quick start we will just use voltage modules and keep it simple.

In our example we set the range to 50V. Have a look at the reference section and you will see this on the LEFT

SIDE of the bar graph. Note that if you change the range, this will change directly below on the bar graph:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-7

PART 2: channel name, units, color… (top-left quadrant)

Now enter a short name for this input channel, any additional info you want into the next field, and then the UNIT OF MEASURE. This is important to do before moving to the next section.

In the example above, we are configuring a channel which will be used to measure air pressure in PSI.

You can also set the color here. The “Min value” and “Max value” and “Sample rate divider” fields will be explained later. These are more advanced, so please ignore them for now.

7-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

PART 3: Scale/CAL your channel (bottom-left quadrant)

In this section you enter whatever scaling your input needs.

-

NOTE : if you are simply measuring voltage from a voltage module, you don’t need to do any scaling (unless the voltage has been stepped down before being input to the Dewetron system).

Let’s say that your transducer outputs 1V for 500 PSI. All you need to do is enter these values into the “by two points” fields, as shown here:

In other words, when your sensor outputs 0V, this represents 0 PSI. But when it outputs 1V, that represents 500

PSI.

This simply establishes the slope of the scaling. In this case it is a linear function which multiplies the input by

500 and changes the UM from V to PSI. You can click the [by function] button and see this algebraically:

This slope is the famous y = mx + b equation from high school. The scaling is created by a multiplier and an offset.

In our example, the offset is zero (none). But there are times when the offset is not zero. For example, if you are scaling from Celcius to Fahrenheit. These two temperature measurement systems have placed ZERO at different places: 0° C = 32° F. So to scale from C to F you would set it up like this:

or…

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-9

It doesn’t matter whether you use the 2-point scaling method or the function scaling method to scale your channel! Use whichever one is more comfortable to you and the scaling factor that you prefer. Both of the methods above are the same. They both express the equation C x 1.8 + 32 = F

Reference Check (bottom-right quadrant)

This fourth quadrant of the channel setup screen provides a handy reference, where the ACTUAL input scale is shown on the left side of the bar graph, and the result of your scaling is shown on the right side of the bar graph:

-

or …

NOTE : DEWESoft will show the data in your scaled units of measurement from this point forward! Of course, the data are really stored unscaled, to preserve all of their resolution, but they are always shown scaled according to what you do here, during and after recording. They are also exported in scaled engineering units.

Look at the channel above on the right, our PSI channel. It shows ±25,000 PSI. But this is too much: your sensor will output only 8 volts max, so the 50V range is too much. No problem! Change the ACTUAL measuring range from 50 to 10V, and look what happens:

>> results in >>

Now the measurement range of 10V yields a scaled measurement range of ±5000 PSI, which is what you were looking for. In this way you can see the relationship between the ACTUAL hardware measuring range and the

SCALED measuring range.

7-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

If everything looks good, then you are ready to move on to the next channel. You can either click [OK] at the bottom of the setup dialog, or click the [ > > ] button to move to the next channel:

Change the Display Scale

One very important thing to note is that the scaled range shown on the right side of the bar graph on the setup screen sets the DEFAULT DISPLAY RANGE for this channel. Therefore, if you were to put this channel into a strip chart, scope, or analog meter gauge on the display screens, the scale will be taken from this bar graph.

Let’s take the example of the thermocouple channel, which is scaled like this:

So, if we put this channel into a strip chart, DEWESoft will set the scale to match the right side of the bar graph, like this:

Note that DEWESoft set the channel’s display scale from -4.5e2 (-454°F) to 2.5e3 (+2498°F).

But what if this range is too much? Let’s say that you expect to only really measure from -100°F to +400°F?

You can change it right here on the graph, which we will cover later. But even better would be to PRE-set the

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-11

display scale of this channel, so that when you put it into a graph or meter which has a scale, it will automatically be set to the desired span. How to preset this default display scale? It is back on the channel’s setup screen, in section 2:

Setting the Default Display Range

If you refer back to PART 2: channel name, units, color..., you will find two fields that we skipped over before.

They are labeled “Min value” and “Max value”. By default they say “Auto” in them, which means that the display range of this channel will be set to the same min and max values of the reference bar graph. But you can override that by entering numbers into either or both of these fields!

So in our example, we want the temperature channel’s default range to be -100°F to ±400°F, therefore we would enter that like this:

Note that making this change will not CHANGE the range of any existing graph, but you can coax them to defer to these settings by right-clicking on the channel name within the graph:

7-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

after right-clicking on the channel name inside the graph:

And when you add this channel into graphs for the first time, they will be scaled at -100°F to ±400°F automatically!

Above, the same temperature channel shown in several different kinds of graphs and meters, they all have the default -100°F to +400°F display scale, because you have preset the display scale back on the setup screen for that channel.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-13

Copying Channel Settings

You just learned a lot in setting up that channel. You set the actual hardware range/filter, then moved left to the channel name, description, units, and possibly set the display range, then moved down to do the scaling… all the while keeping an eye on the reference bar graph to ensure that this channel was set correctly. At this point you might be worrying that this is a lot of work to do on every single analog channel. Is there a shortcut you can take to speed up the process?

Yes! Normally you will have several channels whose configurations are very similar. Here is our set up screen:

OK, you just set the first channel up … and the next three channels are going to be very similar. Their hardware settings will be the same, and possibly even their scaling, display scale settings, etc. How do you copy those settings from channel 0 to the next three channels?

Easy. Click the first box in the SLOT column of the channel that you want to copy:

When you click the SLOT box of any channel, it pops up the Copy/Paste menu. Only Copy is active, since there is nothing to paste yet. Click Copy.

Now click on the SLOT box of channel 1, the next channel down. Suddenly the Paste menu item is active, so click it to paste the settings from Channel 0 to Channel 1:

Now you get some very nice choices, which make the copy/paste process very flexible. Here is what each of the three sub choices under Paste source (<module type> : <channel>) means:

7-14 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

„

Paste - it will simply paste the settings from the channel you copied to this channel, EXCEPT that it will not paste the channel name, channel color, or the Used/Unused status to this channel.

„

„

Paste to all - it will paste the settings from the channel you copied to ALL channels, EXCEPT that it will not paste the channel name, channel color, or the Used/Unused status to the other channels.

Paste special… - here you can choose exactly which parameters it will paste from the channel you copied to this channel, or even a range of channels. So if you wanted to really make them all the same color, or paste to a range of channels (example: copy channel 14 and then paste it to channels 23 to 31).

If you select the Paste special... option, you get this screen where you can control what gets pasted, and to which range of channels:

You can click the boxes in the PASTE column to toggle whether this parameter gets pasted or not. As mentioned, the Used/Unused status is not normally pasted from one channel to another, but here we can override that and paste that, too, as well as the channel name, etc. At the top we told it to paste from Slot 1 to Slot 3, so that channels 1, 2, and 3 will receive this paste simultaneously. Click OK to execute the paste, and see what happens:

The Paste Special function turned those three channels on and pasted every parameter except the channel names and colors from channel 0 to channels 1, 2, and 3. Now you can just modify the channel names right here, and

you’re ready to go.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-15

Just double-click in the white field under the Name column to directly edit any channels’ name. You don’t need to open up the [Set ch. #] dialog box to enter a name or pick a color.

OK, our analog channels are all set up - let’s make the final adjustments and then record some data.

7-16 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Set the Data File Name

You need to tell DEWESoft what to NAME your captured data file. In other words, you need to set the file name.

For this function, please click the File details button in the toolbar:

By default, DEWESoft will put a name like Data into this field. Type in whatever you want, avoiding characters that are illegal to use in Windows filenames, such as $ <> {} [] / \ | ; : , -- you know the list! If you stick with numbers, letters, underscores and hyphens you will be OK.

Automatic Recording STOP function

Let’s say that you want to start storing, and then have DEWESoft record for one hour automatically. Or stop after a certain file size is reached. These functions are easy to control using the Stop storing after checkbox that you can see here. Check it, and some settings controls will appear automatically for you:

With Stop storing after checked, you can set DEWESoft to stop storing automatically based on time (hours, minutes, or seconds), or file size (in MB), or number of triggers within the file.

Automatic File Numbering

Notice the checkbox called Create a Multifile. This means that DEWESoft will automatically name your files for you, so you don’t have to keep entering a new name each time you want to record data.

If you don’t use multifile, and you stored data right now, it would be stored to the filename Data.d7d.

If you come back here, this screen would look different. Do you notice the difference?

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-17

If you saw that the filename “Data” is now written in RED, then you were correct. DEWESoft shows a filename in

RED here if this file already exists! So if you were to try and store again, DEWESoft would stop and tell you that this file exists, and give you the chance to either overwrite it with new data, or enter a new name.

To avoid this, check the Multifile box, and then use the setup button that will appear to pre-configure how DEWE-

Soft will automatically name your files, like so:

The way it is set above, the base part of the filename will be Data, and each time you store data, DEWESoft will add an underscore and then four digits, starting at zero. So you will get a series of data files called:

Data_0000.d7d

Data_0001.d7d

Data_0002.d7d

Data_0003.d7d

Data_0004.d7d

… and so on.

7-18 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Notice also that you could elect to start numbering the files at something higher than 0000. Simply select or enter a starting file number.

Of course, you can change the base part of the filename to anything supported by the Windows OS. In the example below we entered Gear_check as the base part of our filename.

You may also turn on the DATE to be added to the filename. You could also turn on the TIME, which will disable the number at the end (you cannot have both).

In the gray example area, you will see a preview of how your files will be named (as shown above).

Automatic file SWiTCHiNG function

When multifile is not checked, the box below it is called Stop storing after, and as we saw, it allows you to set

DEWESoft to stop storing according to how big the file is, or when a certain amount of time has elapsed.

But when multifile is checked, the Stop storing after function changes slightly to be called Make new file after. In this case, DEWESoft will not stop recording per se, but it will close the current data file and immediately open a new one, which will be named according to the active multifile settings. In other words, instead of STOPPING storage outright, DEWESoft will switch to the next file in the series automatically.

Check the box and you will get similar configuration controls as before:

As before, DEWESoft can switch files automatically based on time (absolute or relative), file size, or trigger count. If you want one triggered event per data file, this is the way to do it, for example. Set it to triggers and set the quantity to 1.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-19

Set the Sample Rate

You need to select a sample rate. This is the number of samples per second that DEWESoft will store for each of your active analog channels. If you have four channels active, and you select a sample rate of 10 kS/s for example,

DEWESoft will stored 10 thousand samples per second for each of the four channels. This means that 40,000 samples will be stored each second. In a 16-bit system that means 80,000 bytes of data per second. In a 22 or 24bit system, it is 160,000 bytes of data per second.

-

Note : Typically you should select a sample rate which is at least twice as high as the highest frequency that you want to measure. The higher the rate, the more time axis resolution you will get, but the bigger the file will get!

You set the rate right here on the ANALOG setup screen, just above the channel list:

Use the Dynamic acquisition rate to set the sample rate. Using the small triangle at the bottom of the field you can change the units of the sample rate, as shown here. So if you think in kiloHertz, for example (kSamples per second per channel), you can select that instead of Hz/ch). You can work in Hz, kHz, or even MHz if you have a really fast system. When you change sample rate units, the value shown in the box will also change accordingly.

To select a rate, either choose one from the list that drops down from the little triangle, or simply type one into the field and press ENTER on the keyboard. If DEWESoft cannot do this range, it will correct it and show you what it can do:

There are several storing modes in DEWESoft, but in this first example we are simply going to store manually, by pressing STORE then STOP. Later in this QuickStart guide we will come back and learn how to use reduced storage mode and the triggered modes.

7-20 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Save Your Setup

Everything that you can set up in DEWESoft is saved to a setup file that you can name freely (according to Windows file naming restrictions of course). It is ALWAYS a good idea to save your setup before moving on from here.

You need to be in the SETUP mode (as we have been for many pages now). On the left side of the toolbar are large buttons for [Save] and [Save as]. If you have not yet named this setup file and you click [Save], DEWESoft treat this the same as if you had clicked [Save as].

Use [Save as] to save the current setup configuration to a new name. So you can open an existing setup that you like, use [Save as] to make a copy of it under a new name, then change it freely! No need to start from the beginning each time.

WHAT’S NEXT?

Yes, there are many other kinds of channels that Dewetron systems typically have, such as digital inputs, counter/encoders, video cameras, CAN BUS interfaces, and more… but this is a quickstart guide and we will focus on making simple analog input recordings.

There are also several storing methods, such as triggering and reduced data. But for the quickstart we will focus on the ALWAYS FAST mode, which is like a tape recorder: you manually press STORE and DEWESoft records your active input channels at the selected dynamic acquisition rate, until you press STOP.

Are you ready to record some data?

It is better if you have some real signals connected to your channels. Even a simple 9VDC transistor battery, or a function generator that can output a sine wave, is a great way to input signals. If you have nothing but straight lines on the screen, it is impossible to learn how to zoom in, for example.

So please take a moment and connect at least one real signal to your dewetron system, and then let’s move forward to the MEASURE screen, where we will use the default displays and STORE some data.

After that we will learn how to replay it.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-21

Using the Acquisition Screens

When you click ACQUISITION from the ribbon at the top of the DEWESoft window, the default displays will appear: Overview, Scope, Recorder, and FFT:

If this is your first visit to Overview, there will be a digital meter group containing any channels that are set to

USED back on the analog setup screen.

In the example above, just one channel is active.

-

Note : going back and activating more channels will not automatically add them to this screen - you have to do that manually.

7-22 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Elements of the Acquisition screen

What exactly do the Acquisition screens contain? It might seem complex at first, but there are really just four main functional groups of objects, as shown here:

Notice that four screens are created for you by default. click on the Scope, Recorder, and FFT screens and see how they are set up by default. You can change everything about these screens as mentioned earlier, but for now let’s use them as they are, and then come back to the design functions later.

1. RIBBON AND TOOLBAR - contains the DEWESoft ribbon, where you can navigate among the setup screens, display screens, and design mode. Also contains the toolbar, which has buttons to start and stop storing data, and select which screen to display.

2. PROPERTIES BAR - where you can set the properties of any display widget in the Data display area, as well as the properties of each display screen

3. DATA DISPLAY AREA - where your signals are shown, according to which display screen has been selected from the toolbar

4. CHANNEL LIST - shows your channels, and allows you to assign them into graphs and widgets.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-23

Please click on the Recorder button in the toolbar to activate that display:

The recorder shows you one big graph by default. Or perhaps more graphs depending on how many channels were set to USED when you first come here after leaving the setup screen. We had only one channel USED, so DEWE-

Soft gave us one graph with our one channel on it. Common questions at this point:

Is my data being stored already? I see it moving on the screen!

No. It is being monitored but not yet stored, because we did not click the STORE button yet.

I see some data that just went by, but I want to save it to disk. Is this possible?

No, data being monitored is not stored. It is not possible to capture it now.

Can I freeze this display right now? What about when I am storing data?

7-24 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

To freeze the display when just monitoring data (not storing), press the STOP button. It will change to say START when you do that, so that you can re-start it moving on the screen.

If you are STORING data, and you press STOP, the recording will STOP and the screen will stop moving.

If you want to freeze the display while DEWESoft continues to store data in the background, use the FREEZE button instead! This is limited by a RAM buffer, so you cannot freeze the display and look back in time beyond the amount of RAM that is available for this function.

Speed up/Slow down the recorder graph

If the data are scrolling past too slowly or too fast, use the blue [+] and [-]

STORE SOME DATA

Let’s get down to business and record some data. Press the STORE button and the screen will be cleared. A red vertical line appears and your data is now storing to disk. This is also indicated in the LOG in the toolbar area:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-25

Close-up view of the recording log:

Marking your recordings with EvENTS

„

„

„

During recording, you can mark your data in three ways:

Notice event - just hit the spacebar on the keyboard, and a gray line will be time-stamped and added to the recorder graph. This is like the simple event marker of an old fashioned chart recorder.

Text event - press the N key on the keyboard. Click on the log area if necessary to open the log for typing. Just type in whatever you like. The text event will be time-stamped according to when you pressed N, not when you finish typing, so there is no rush!

Voice event - (requires that sound events be activated in the project configuration, and that your Dewetron system has a usable sound card installed) press and hold V on the keyboard, and talk into your PC mic (not included by Dewetron). A short voice message will be added to the data file.

You will see all of these events later when you reload this captured data to the screen. More about that later.

Each event type is indicated on the screen with a vertical line of a different color. You can also activate them using the little icons near the log area instead of the keyboard shortcuts, as shown here.

Stop storing...

Press the STOP button and the recording will be closed. The screen will freeze.

-

Note: there are also hardware STORE and STOP buttons on the front panel of the DEWE-3210 and DEWE-

3211 models, with an adjacent LED STORiNG DATA indicator. it doesn’t matter whether you use the hardware or software buttons.

7-26 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Reloading your Data Files

This is as simple as pressing the ANALYSIS button near the top-left of the screen! If you have not gone to any other screen since stopping the recording, DEWESoft will automatically load the last data file that you recorded.

Here it is!

Replay reference strip

Across the top of the DISPLAY AREA is something new: the display reference bar. By default, DEWESoft puts the first channel into this reference strip. When you load a data file, the entire file is displayed.

The beginning of the data is on the left, and the end is on the right.

This reference strip will become very useful when you ZOOM IN on the data. Let’s learn how to do that now.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-27

Zooming in and zooming out

It is important to know how to zoom in and out on various parts of your data, to look closer and make measurements. Notice that when you are in the Analysis mode, there are two grey cursors and one yellow cursor on the screen. The yellow cursor is also shown in the reference strip at the top.

But let’s use the gray cursors to zoom. Simply drag them into position around the area that you want to zoom. Or, you can simply click and drag to the right, then release, to set the cursors.

Now move the pointer between them, and you will notice that it changes to a pointer with a small PLUS symbol below it:

To zoom this area, simply CLICK with your mouse (or touch with your finger, if you have a touchscreen) between these cursors!

7-28 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Notice what the screen looks like now:

See how the area that you zoomed has been highlighted into a little box? This is done to show you WHERE in the data file you are looking on the recorder, and roughly how much of the data is being shown. This is a great reference, and is needed once you start zooming in.

Zoom in again and again!

You can zoom in as many times as you like.

How to unzoom?

There are two ways:

1. Simply RIGHT-CLICK onto the recorder graph, and each zoom that you have done will be un-zoomed in reverse order. So you can step backward through your zooms perfectly.

2. Use the blue MINUS button at the bottom right corner of the recorder graph to reduce the amount of time shown on the graph.

Move the zoom box

The small zoom box shown in the reference strip can be directly moved. Use the mouse and drag it left or right.

Or, use the PAGE+UP and PAGE+DOWN buttons on your keyboard to move it in whole steps. You can also move it in half steps by using the left and right arrow keys on your keyboard.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-29

Make direct measurements on any channel

Simply by moving the pointer along any waveform, DEWESoft will show you a color-coded X and Y values in engineering units in the top-left corner of the recorder graph. The pointer turns into a crosshairs when you move it along a waveform. Notice the values shown at the top of the graph:

Using the Cursors

DEWESoft uses these cursors in two ways: to zoom as shown above, and to make measurements on the signals. To make full use of them, activate the cursor checkbox in the properties panel on the left, when your recorder graph is active:

Before you check the box Show cursor values, the delta-T is already shown here. In the screen shot above, notice the label: dt = 6.7 ms f = 149 Hz

Therefore, the delta time between the cursors is less than 7 ms (<0.007 s), and the reciprocal of that time interval is 149 Hz.

Now check the Show cursor values box, and notice that the recorder graph will get a new panel on its right side, which shows the cursor I and cursor II values in a table:

7-30 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

So we see the value of the channel called Master Cylinder at cursor I, cursor II, and then the calculated delta amplitude value.

If a recorder graph has more than one channel in it, cursor readings for the other channels will also be shown here, like in this example:

You can also move the cursors and take readings at exact locations. Simply drag each cursor into position. To prevent accidentally zooming because you clicked in between them, you can LOCK each cursor using the little padlock icons on the properties panel.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-31

Print Out Your Data

You might want to make a print out on paper after recording data. To do this, make the screen look how you want it to appear on the paper by zooming and using the cursor controls. Next, click the PRINT item from the ribbon along the top of the DEWESoft window.

You can turn the page to portrait or landscape orientation using the buttons in the toolbar.

Want to add some text to the page? Simply type it into the text field in the toolbar, and it will appear on the header of the printed page.

7-32 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Add your company logo to printouts

You can associate a BMP image to DEWESoft, so that it will be printed in the header when you print your data.

Click the Settings menu near the top right corner of the DEWESoft screen. Click on Global setup... to open the dialog box.

When the dialog opens, click on the Print tab to see those settings:

Click on the ellipsis […] button and then choose the bitmap (*.bmp) image that you want to appear on your printed output.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-33

Next time you print something, it will have your logo at the top-left.

Export Your Data

You might need to convert the DEWESoft data file to another format, so that you can open it in a different analysis program. You can do this from the Analysis mode. Open a data file, and then zoom in if you want to export only a certain portion of the data file. If you want to export it all, do not zoom in.

After opening a data file, click the EXPORT item from the ribbon near the top of the DEWESoft screen:

Now click the File export button from the toolbar. When you do, you will see a list of file formats that you can convert this data file to. Select any one of them. DEWESoft will put the name of this data file into the Export file name field automatically - however, you can change it to whatever you like. But please do not add the file extension, because DEWESoft will add it automatically.

-

NOTE : to export to either Excel or Flexpro formats, you need to have these applications on this computer! Otherwise, exporting will not work! This is because DEWESoft needs to communicate with these programs to export to them properly.

7-34 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Modify the Screens

It is not possible to do this subject justice in such a short manual. But you should know that you can enter the

Design mode by clicking the Design button in the ribbon near the top of the DEWESoft screen, and then change virtually every aspect of each screen. This is one of the most powerful and popular features of DEWESoft. Have a look at just a few of the screens that you can make in a matter of moments:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-35

Use the hardware STORE and STOP buttons

Unlike most Dewetron instruments, the DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include hardware buttons for starting and stopping recording. You may use them just like you use the on-screen buttons labeled the same: STORE and STOP.

These hardware buttons are active at the same time that the software buttons are active.

The built-in LED will illuminate when data is storing. When you press STOP, the LED will go dark, and the storing will stop.

7-36 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-37

Part 2 - Projects and Global settings

This is part 2 of our QuickStart Guide to DEWESoft 7! It was written at the time of DEWESoft version 7.0.1, however it will remain largely compatible with higher versions of the software. It is meant to help you reach the next level of knowledge with DEWESoft. Part 1 focused 100% on the analog inputs, and using the measure screens as they are. In Part 2, you will see how to configure DEWESoft the way that you like it both at the highest possible level (Global level) as well as at the Project level -- and explain the difference. The Project level is especially important to learn about, since it never existed before DEWESoft7.

NOTE : In this manual we will refer to DEWESoft as “DEWESoft” as shorthand.

What is a Dewesoft Project?

You can consider a Project to be like a “hardware profile,” in that it defines the hardware that you will be using with DEWESoft. It also contains flexible settings that control how the system behaves. Let’s say that you have a computer that you sometimes use a DEWE-43-V (USB connection), and other times you connect a DEWESoft-

NET ethernet based system, or other times yet, you use an ORION A/D card and rack of DAQ modules outside your computer.

In DEWESoft6, there was only one global hardware setup, which you would have to change each time you wanted to connect these different pieces of hardware to. But now with “Projects,” you can make and name a hardware profile for each possibility. But a project defines more than just the hardware setup, as we will learn in this Quick-

Start Guide.

To see your Projects, click the [Settings] button near the top-right corner of the DEWESoft window:

The first item is called Project >

Click it to open the submenu, where you can see your existing Projects, and then some controls below them for adding a new Project, renaming the active Project, removing a Project, etc.

If you have not visited here before, you probably have a single Project called Default (you always need to have at least one Project, otherwise you would have no hardware setup!).

7-38 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

In our case, we have a Project called “DEMO,” in which there is no data acquisition hardware defined, and

DEWESoft creates waveforms for demo and training purposes. The checkbox tells us that this is the currently active Project. There is also another project called “DEWE43,” which is used when we connect our DEWE-43-V unit, and a third Project called “Sound card,” in which we use the computer’s sound card as a two channel sound recorder.

Hardware setup screen

Let’s check the hardware settings of the active Project. Simply click the Hardware setup… menu item. This menu will close and the hardware setup dialog will open.

Hardware setup is where you control all of the hardware connected to your system, as well as the options that you might have purchased for DEWESoft. Your license info is also stored here. There are several screens, starting with

ANALOG.

You can see that we have selected No A/D Hardware, since we want this project to be purely for demo and training purposes, even when there is no hardware connected. But we have selected the Amplifiers to be COM port or offline, so that we can use them in the setup mode for training.

In our other Project where we connect the DEWE-43-V and DAQ modules to make real measurements, the hardware setup screen looks different, of course:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-39

There are other tabs for setting up other input types, such as CAN, GPS, VIDEO...and more. The Plugins tab is where you activate software plugins that you have purchased for DEWESoft (some plugins are free). Registration is where you enter your license information.

One source of potential confusion is the Math tab, so it is worth mentioning here:

MATH Options

It is important to note that the Basic functions (Filter, Formula, Statistics…) box can be checked. These functions are included with all versions of DEWESoft. It should be checked for you already, but if it isn’t, go ahead and check it.

However, the additional features below that are OPTIONAL - i.e., they have to be paid for. If you check their boxes, and you do not have a license, you will not be able to click OK and use DEWESoft!

7-40 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

-

Note : The DEWESoft-DEWESoftA version includes most of these options. However, Power requires the additional option called DEWESoft-OPT-POWER.

BUT if you want to try them before buying them, the solution is simple: create a new project called DEMO and then set it up with NO A/D HARDWARE like we did, and then you can turn on every option in the world! No license is needed for the demo mode! In demo mode, DEWESoft will generate sinusoidal waveforms that you can use to test any function that you want, without any license.

And now with the ability to have different projects, you don’t have to take a risk by changing your “real” hardware setup -- just make a project called DEMO and then set up the hardware for this demo/testing mode, where every option is turned on. The only thing you cannot do is try these functions with real data coming in (unless you purchase the option of course).

These options are called “built-ins” because they are included already in the DEWESoft source code - they simply require a valid license to be used for real.

DEWESoft Plugins

Then there are options which can be added in to DEWESoft as little snippets of code, or quick large chunks, called

PLUGINS. These plugins are easy to install - you simply copy them into the \addons directory under the DEWE-

Soft program file location on the hard disk. Then restart DEWESoft, and all installed plugins will be shown in the

Plugins tab here on hardware setup. For example:

Above you can see that we have a bunch of plugins installed. Some of them are free of charge, while others are included with the hardware option that you have purchased from us, or are an extra cost option.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-41

To activate a plugin you need to toggle it to Used, as you can see we have done above with the DEWESoft-NET plugin. When you click some plugins, they may have some additional features or configuration selections that will appear in the Plugin properties area at the bottom of the dialog box. Not all plugins have this.

Please consult with your Dewetron sales person to learn more about which plugins are available for DEWESoft.

More Project Properties

In addition to the hardware and licensing configuration that you set up on the Hardware setup dialog, each project also contains several other properties that you can configure according to your needs. Click again on the [Settings] button near the top-right corner of the DEWESoft window:

Notice now the item called “Project setup…”. Please click it to open the dialog box:

7-42 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

„

„

„

„

This dialog has several subsections, including:

„

„

Project folders - where you can set your default folders for setup files, data files, and exported data files

Starting setup - where you can force DEWESoft to load a particular setup and screen when it loads

Security - where you can establish password protection of the setup mode

Internal variables - where you can define project level variables which can be used in Math channels, displayed on the screen, etc. These can be text or numeric variables.

Data header - where you can set up a data entry box that will appear automatically before or after data storage, to force the operator to enter whichever test parameters you want added to the data file

Memory - top level control of DEWESoft’s use of physical RAM

The settings that you make here will apply to only the active Project! This is a lot of flexibility.

Most of the project subsections are obvious how to use, so we won’t get into them here in the QuickStart. But there are two subsections worth a closer look: Internal Variables and Data Header, so we will do that now!

internal variables

Here you can define variables which will exist at the Project level. That means that they will be available to all setups which are created when this project is active. Variables can be in the form of TEXT or NUMERIC values.

To create a variable, click the [+] symbol, and a default channel will be added, which you can directly edit.

You can rename the variable’s ID, channel name, and even give it a unit of measurement and color, if it will be used as a channel. Next you can set the TYPE of data that it should contain: whether a floating, integer, or text value.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-43

If it is a numeric type, you can set the channel type to single or async. This does not apply to text data types.

„

„

A “single” value means that it is treated like a static number in DEWESoft.

An “Async” value is treated more like a channel in DEWESoft. This means that it could be processed in a series of calculations, like a filter. But there is no way to filter a static value. As a result of this distinction, both async and single value numeric variables can be used within the FORMULA kind of math channel. However, only an async value could be processed by a FILTER math channel. Do you see the difference?

Finally, you can set the default value. This field is quite wide, which is useful when this variable will hold some text.

Above we have created four variables - one of each basic type: text, floating number, and integer number. In addition, there are two versions of floating numbers: one which is async and another which is a single value.

So now what can we do with these variables? Well basically, we can use them in MATH channels, and we can also simply put them on the screen in any setup that is active when this Project is active! These values will be stored with any data files that are created when this project is active.

7-44 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Using variables in Math channels

Numeric variables can be used within your MATH channels, which is their primary purpose after all. You can use these variables to hold constants, for example, which are needed in your calculations.

If you create a new FORMULA math channel, you will see how you can use them:

Above you can see that in the formula math setup, there is a tab called Variables, which will appear as soon as there is at least one variable created for the current Project! So you can use these values within your MATH formulas, as shown above… we are dividing the real analog signal called ‘Oil’ by the variable called ‘Oil_Temp.”

This formula creates a new virtual channel called ‘Oil_calc’ with the units ‘C’ (notice how we entered those parameters near the top-left corner of the screen above).

So now this new math channel is available to be placed on the screen. Let’s take a look at that by clicking the

Measure button near the top of the DEWESoft window:

Click Measure from the ribbon...

After clicking Measure you will see the first display screen, called Overview. If this is the first time you have visited the Overview screen with this setup, DEWESoft will automatically put your USED channels onto the screen in the form of digital meters, like this:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-45

Looking at the right side of the display, you can see a list of channels shown in the grey, vertical task bar. By default these channels are GROUPED according to type.

In this setup we have analog channels, then the one Math channel, then our Variables.

Each channel is shown within its group. Each group is collapsible.

In the first DEWESoft QuickStart Guide we showed you the channel list, but we did not show you how to get the most from it. We will do that in a future QuickStart Guide.

For now just have a look at the screen -- and notice how your channels appear within the digital meters:

Even your text variable can be shown in a digital meter! Basically every kind of channel can be displayed in this meter (there are very few exceptions, and not worth mentioning at this point).

7-46 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Data header

In this subsection of the Project setup, you can define a form that will appear when you record data, in order to collect some additional information from the operator about the test.

„

„

„

When you first come to this subsection, it will look like the screen shot above. The main part of the dialog box will be completely empty, as shown here. This is your workspace, where you can create data input fields that the test operator will use later. There are three things that you can add to this workspace:

Info - This is basically just a section header, which you can freely name.

Input - A field which will collect alphanumeric input from the user

Selection - A control that allows the user to pick from a list that you have predefined

OK, let’s see how all these work. It is normally a good idea to start by writing down on paper what you want to collect from the user. Just use a piece of paper, and then refer to it as you duplicate it in the software. Let’s say that you want to collect this information, arranged in these groups:

Test operator info: name

ID number

Test article info: model name (could be model A, model B, or model C) serial number lot number

Test procedure info:

ATP number (could be 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, or 22a)

ATP step (could be any number from 1 to 100)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-47

How would you create this? It’s quite simple. Let’s start with the first group of info:

Test operator info: name

ID number

First we create the group, by clicking the icon, then editing its label below, like this:

Now we have a section, and we can add the fields below it. The first field we want to collect is the operator’s name. If you have a lot of operators and it is not practical to predefine them all, just use an Input field, so that the user can type his or her name freely.

Click the icon, then edit the label, as shown here:

Now we want to add the ID number field. Repeat the same step: click the icon, then edit the label:

7-48 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Great! Section 1 is done. We have created a category, and then defined two input fields that the operator can type into when data is recorded. Let’s move on and create the next section, and learn how to create a selection field. As a reminder, here is what we need to create:

Test article info: model name (could be model A, model B, or model C) serial number lot number

So first we create the category header by clicking the icon, then editing its label below:

Easy enough. But now we need to create a selector so that the operator can simply choose from model A, model

B, or model C (and nothing else). To do that, you click the icon, and then edit its label:

But this field looks different than the simpler Input fields that we created before. A selector control requires that you define the selections right now. To do that, click the (ellipsis) button:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-49

The selection list dialog opens, where you can add new items to the list. Above we have typed “model A” into the new item field, then clicked the Add item button below, to move it into the list. Do the same for “model B” and

“model C,” then click OK.

At this point you have the idea, right? Please continue along and add the rest of the items from our checklist, until it looks like this:

If you change your mind and want to delete a field, or rearrange the order of them, there are controls exactly for those functions:

To move a field up or down, use the icons shown here. Also, you can use the Delete icon to remove a field completely. To select WHICH FIELD to move or delete, simply click on the field, and it will get a darker color field behind it, like the one called “Rabbits” here:

7-50 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

With this field selected, click the icon and it will go away. There is no UNDO, so be careful.

If your form is ready, there is still one very important step left: you must tell DEWESoft WHEN to show this form to the operator! There are checkboxes near the bottom, where you can tell DEWESoft to pop up this form at the start of acquisition, or at the end, or both.

It is critical to check at least ONE of these boxes, otherwise the form will never appear! Remember that this data header exists at the PROJECT LEVEL. Therefore, it does not matter which setup you use when storing data: when this project is active, the data header and internal variable settings that you establish here will be applied during recording.

Let’s see how this works.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-51

OK, we have our system set up and ready to record. Using the info in DEWESoft QuickStart-1 you learned how to set up and scale your channels, and in QuickStart-2 you have learned how to create internal variables and a data header. You have combined variables and real data in the MATH section to create virtual channels, which will be displayed and recorded, too. The sample rate is set up and you have a nice screen to look at.

Press STORE and watch what happens:

7-52 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Congratulations! When you press STORE, the Data Header dialog will instantly appear, and your operator can fill in the fields and then click OK to continue.

Selectors that you have predefined will show their first value by default, so if you want to force the operator to make a choice, you can create a first selection like “--” or “choose” when you define the selection.

If you think that your operators will be annoyed by this data header and will skip over it, you could also check the box to have it appear at the end of storing, when they have more time to fill it out.

Data headers can be as long as you like. If you create many fields, the screen will automatically create NEXT and

PREV buttons to navigate through multiple pages of fields. But take care: few people want to fill out so many

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-53

fields, and will quickly grow tired of it.

If you store data, stop, and then store again, the data header will appear again -- with the fields already filled in from the first run. So the operator just needs to change any fields which might have a different value now… the other fields can be left alone.

Looking at the data header information later

Data header values, and all variables from the project that was active when a given data file was created, are stored within the header of the data file. This is crucial for documentation purposes! How can you see this info?

In the Analyze mode, click ONCE on any data file. In our case, we just captured some data called Test.d7d, so let’s have a look:

When you click on the name of a data file here, you will see the header information from this file below, in several tabbed areas:

7-54 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

„

„

„

„

„

Settings - shows the basic settings of the data file (sample rate, date and time of storing, duration, and many more elements about each of the captured channels)

Events - there are always at least two events in any data file: the date and time storing started, and the date and time when it stopped.

Data header - what we just created! The fields are captured here

File locking - whether this file is protected against post-processing or not

Preview - a simple look at one of the display screens

We cover all of this in more detail in the manual, but for now click the Data header tab and see what is captured here:

Yes, your inputs are safely stored within the data file, for documentation purposes! What else can you do with these values? Can you print them out or show them on the screens?

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-55

To print out the data header info:

First, load the data file by double-clicking its name from the list. Then click the SETUP button in the ribbon:

At this point you can review the various elements contained within the header by clicking their icons: Channels,

Events, Data header, File locking, etc. But if you just want to make a print-out, click the PRINT button in the ribbon, and you will get a preview of what the paper will look like:

When you do a print preview from captured data, with the SETUP clicked in the ribbon, you will see a preview of the entire header section of the data file.

To get a preview of the DATA itself, i.e., any of your display screens, simply click REVIEW from the ribbon, then click PRINT in the ribbon:

7-56 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

variables within the data header

You might have noticed that DEWESoft creates a variable from each of the fields that you create in your data header. These variables can be displayed and used in processes, just like the internal variables that you created earlier!

For example, let’s say that each time you run a test you need to input a variable that will be used in a math channel. Like doing repetitive valve tests, where different valve diameters are used all the time, as one example. You could ask the operator to simply enter the valve diameter using the Data header pop-up, and then this value will be processed mathematically in whatever way you want!

Imagine a situation where a tolerance is calculated by multiplying a constant value by another value which might change from test to test? This is not a problem: you can use the Internal Variables that we learned about earlier to hold a constant value, and use the Data header field to collect a second value at run time from the operator…. then put them together in a math channel.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-57

Above - we add an internal variable to hold the valve circumference, which will not change from test to test...

Above - then we create a data header question that the operator needs to respond to at the beginning of each recording, called Valve diameter. DEWESoft automatically assigns it a unique ID - but let’s change it to “Valve-

Diam” to make it easier to identify this parameter later. Now you should also define the TYPE of data that can be entered: text, integer, or floating number. Since a number is absolutely required here, you should not allow the operator to enter text, for example! You may also define the units and color of this channel.

Above - we create a MATH channel that we named ‘Valve_calc’ which will combine these two values and give you the output that you need to test against!

This particular math channel doesn’t really make any sense: it is just one hypothetical example of how you can use these variables in DEWESoft.

7-58 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Displaying variables on the screen

So now you can see that project variables - whether they are predefined or collected from the operator at run time, can be quite powerful. Importantly, they are captured within the header of the data file, and are thus a permanent part of the documentation.

You can use them mathematically, or simply show them on the screen. How to do that? Let’s see:

Did you notice that in the channel list, ALL VARIABLES are shown? If your variables are not showing, then perhaps you are clicked on a display object which cannot hold them, like a scope or FFT graph. To reveal all of them, click on a digital meter … then look at the channel list. You can see in the example above that there is a group of variables, and within it, there are now two sub-groups, labeled ‘Data Header’ and ‘Internal Variables’, and they contain exactly the variable names that we defined above.

In the screen above we have simply put these variables, as well as the real and math channels into meters.

Note that the data header variable is unknown until you press STORE and then the operator enters a number!

Then that value will be known to DEWESoft, and also will be used in the MATH channel that calls for it. This is what has happened above.

Projects Summary

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-59

You can make as many Projects as you require. This is a handy way to quickly configure the system for different test scenarios, and different hardware configurations. A great example is when you have a channel expansion box: sometimes you need it, and sometimes you don’t You can therefore make a different Project for each configuration.

But that’s only the beginning: you might have only one hardware configuration, but you can use Projects for different test scenarios, since the data header and internal variables exist at the project level, and they are a great source of automation and documentation, as you have seen above.

We suggest that you make a Project called DEMO that you can use for training, as well as to try all of the options that are available as built-ins and plug-ins.

7-60 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Global Setup

In the previous section you learned how to create Projects, which will set up the system in a certain configuration.

But then there are some configuration parameters that you can at the highest level, i.e., above the level of any particular Project. This is the Global setup, and by definition there can be only one.

Referring again to the [Settings] button, click it and then select the “Global setup…” item.

When you select this item you will get the Global setup dialog box:

„

„

„

„

„

„

There are several tabs on this dialog, which allow you to configure these parameters:

General - where you can set the language, character set, default sample rate, and similar

Displays - where you can control which screens are active by default, and set the display background color

Sound - where you can active VOICE EVENTS for data storing, and trigger sounds from the PC sound card

Print - where you can define several aspects of printing, and link to your company’s logo to print on reports

Folders - where you can set up the default folders for top level settings and the sensor database

Amplifier - (Infrequently used) top level Amplifier setting. Please leave this alone unless instructed otherwise

The most often-used features at this top level are: Changing the DEWESoft background color

The default background color is dark blue. However, if you plan on printing reports frequently directly from

DEWESoft, you might want to change the background to WHITE, because then the screen and paper output will match. Also, this will prevent you from using really light colors like yellow (or white), which look great against dark blue, but which are impossible to see when printed on white paper.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-61

To change the background color to white, click the [Displays] button on the Global settings dialog box:

Here you can simply set the color to white using the selector.

Here is the difference:

Adding a logo to your printouts

7-62 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

To add a logo, click the [Print] button on the Global settings dialog box:

Now click the […] button and then choose a BMP logo file that will be printed when you print stored data onto paper.

Summary

This concludes Part 2 of the DEWESoft QuickStart Guide. We have still only scratched the surface of this amazing data acquisition software program. There are more input types, more math functions, and … well, it’s a long list.

Please refer to the DEWESoft 7 Manual and DEWESoft 7 Tutorials for further information about how to use these advanced capabilities, or make arrangements to attend a Dewetron training class, where you can really learn a lot.

Finally, please experiment with DEWESoft and try everything. The software is quite intuitive once you get started.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 7, QUICksTART GUIDE TO OPERATION | 7-63

7-64 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

100~250 VAC @ 50/60 Hz

AC Mains input

Standard 3-pin power connector

When the power switch is in the OFF position, no power will be output from the DPS-2410. if you plug the DPS-2410 into your DEWE-321x to recharge its batteries, or to power the

DEWE-321x, the DPS-2410 power switch must be in the ON position.

⇒

Filtered air intake

⇒

DO NOT BLOCK THE FAN

PORT! Blocked or dirty fans can cause the DPS-

2410 to overheat and shut down, or become damaged.

24 VDC output

LEMO EGG.2B.302.CLL

(mate FGG.2B.302.CLAD82)

-

A mating cable is included with the DPS-2410, to connect it to the DEWE-

321x power input

DPS-2410 AC/DC power supply

Yellow/green ground connector

-

Note - it is considered a

“best practice” to connect the ground point to the test stand and to the DEWE-

321x, to prevent ground loops.

LED green POWER

ON indicator

Fuse: standard ATO “regular” fuse,

10A (red color code), reference

ISO 8820-3

⇒

Always replace the fuse with the same exact kind as provided from the factory!

Damage to the DPS-2410, or personal injury or even death can result from using the wrong fuse value or type. Replacement fuses are available from Dewetron if you have any questions or concerns.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 8, POWER RElATED ACCEssORIEs | 8-1

8

Power Related Accessories

DPS-2410 external AC/DC power supply

The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include a Dewetron Power Supply (DPS) which outputs 24VDC at 10 amps

(2410). Thus, the model name is DPS-2410. The DPS-2410 is used to power your system from 120/240VAC.

When connected and powered on, it will also recharge any batteries which are installed within the system at the same time.

Here are the relevant specifications for this power supply:

Parameter

Power input:

Power output:

Ground:

Switch:

Indicator:

Fan:

Construction:

DSP-2410

100~250 VAC, 50/60 Hz standard worldwide power from AC mains

24 VDC nominal level, up to 10.5A absolute max (10A nominal and fused) yellow/green stripe color coded mini banana jack referenced to ground.

AC mains power switch, turns off the DPS-2410 completely (there is no hot standby mode)

Green LED indicates that the DPS-2410 is connected to power and turned

ON.

Built into the top cover. Series 1 models: black plastic fan bezel. Series 2 models: flush metal fan grille.

Aluminum with rubber shock protection corners

DPS-2410 Dimensions

124

111

213

78

Dimensions in millimeters (mm)

Divide by 25.4 for inches

136

225

8-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Neutrino-4

The Neutrino-4 is an optional external battery charger and additional DC power supply unit. It can recharge four

Dewetron standard batteries (model BATT-95WH) simultaneously when powered from 120/240 VAC. The Neutrino-4 has a built-in LCD display exactly like the one which is on the DEWE-321x mainframe, so it will show you the number of batteries inside and their aggregate charge status.

Using a special power cable, the Neutrino-4 can also be unplugged from AC and plugged into the DC input of the

DEWE-321x to provide an additional power source. With a full loaded and charged Neutrino-4 plus the two batteries already within the DEWE-321x, you then have the power of six Dewetron BATT-95WH batteries. Since a rule of thumb is that you typically get one hour of data acquisition time per battery, this means your system can run practically an entire work day without being connected to external power.

Above left: with the door open and batteries partially or completely removed

Above right: with the door closed

Like the DEWE-321x mainframe itself, the Neutrino also supports hot-swapping of its batteries, so you can feed in fresh batteries at regular intervals, to keep it supplying DC power indefinitely.

What’s included with the Neutrino-4, when ordered with your DEWE-321x:

„

„

„

„

The Neutrino-4 mainframe

AC mains input power cord

DC - DC power cord, to connect the Neutrino-4 to your DEWE-321x

One (1) BATT-95WH smart battery (please order additional batteries separately if you require them)

The Neutrino-4 has the CE Mark

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 8, POWER RElATED ACCEssORIEs | 8-3

DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO

This is an isolated DC-DC converter that will power your Dewetron battery powered instrument from a wide ranging DC input power source, and also isolate it from that source.

This option is very popular in automotive applications, due to its isolation. And of course, it runs from such a wide range of DC input power: 10 VDC to 36 VDC, that it is very convenient for use in cars, trucks, busses, and even aircraft.

You can order the DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO as an accessory for any Dewetron instrument which runs from DC power, as long as that instrument accepts 24 VDC.

Parameter

Input:

Input voltage:

Max. input current:

Input connector:

Output: Output voltages: Output power: Output current: Output connector:

Operating temperature: Derating above 45 °C:

Isolation voltage:

Status LED:

Dimensions: (W x D x H):

Weight:

Power on sequence:

The DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO has the CE Mark

DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO

10 to 36 VDC (the input is protected against wrong polarity)

36 A @ 10 VDC input voltage (15 A @ 24 VDC)

2-pin LEMO connector male, type: EGJ.3B.302

24 V 300 W 12.5 A 2-pin LEMO connector female, type: EGG.2B.302

-20 °C to 60 °C 8 Watt/°C

500 VDC

Green LED indicates an output voltage > 21 VDC

~219 x 122 x 50 mm (8.6 x 4.8 x 2 in.)

1.3 kg (2.9 lbs)

First: Connect the system and the DCDC! Followed by the DCDC and the power supply connection.

8-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MSI Compatibility chart

MSI Modular Smart Interfaces for MDAQ and DAQ series modules

MSI-BR-ACC

MSI-BR-V-200

MDAQ-SUB-

STG-D

MDAQ-SUB-

BRIDGE-D

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-D

DAQP-STG

DAQP-

BRIDGE-A*

--

DAQP-

BRIDGE-B

--

DAQP-LV-D

√ √ -√ --

Isotron (constant current powered) adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector Excitation current 4 mA at 21 V,

High pass filter 1.5 Hz, BNC connector

Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier

Automatic identification via TEDS

√ √ -√ ----

200 V input adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector Differential input configuration, BNC connector

Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier

Automatic identification via TEDS

MSI-BR-RTD

MSI-BR-CH-50

MSI-BR-TH-X

MSI-V-ACC

MSI-V-RTD

√ √ -not needed ---

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000 and Pt2000 adapter for MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules with DB9 connector

2, 3 and 4 wire connection methods, 5-pin Binder 710 series connector

Automatic identification via TEDS

--

√ √ -√ ----

Charge input interface for DAQP-STG and MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG with DB9 connector Range up to 50000 pC, AC coupled with 0.07

Hz, BNC signal connection

Max. 100 kHz bandwidth (dependent on the max. bandwidth of the amplifier)

Automatic identification via TEDS

√ √ -√ √ √ --

Thermocouple type K / J / T adapter for DAQP-BRIDGE-x and MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE / -STG modules

For use with isolated thermocouple sensors only ! (except in combination with DAQP-STG-D or DAQP-BRIDGE-A*, which are isolated)

High accuracy cold junction reference measurement, 1 m thermo cable with Mini TC connector

Automatic identification via TEDS*

--√ ---√

--

Isotron (constant current powered) adapter for DAQP-V-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D

Excitation current 4 mA at 21 V, High pass filter 1.5 Hz, BNC connector

Bandwidth and ranges are defined by connected amplifier

Automatic identification via TEDS

-√ ---√

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500 and Pt1000 adapter for DAQP-V-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D

2, 3 and 4 wire connection methods, 5-pin Binder 710 series connector

Automatic identification via TEDS

√ MSI-V-CH-50 --√ ---

Charge input interface for DAQP-LV-D and MDAQ-SUB-V200-D

Range up to 50000 pC, AC coupled with 0.07 Hz, BNC signal connection

Max. 100 kHz bandwidth (dependent on the max. bandwidth of the amplifier)

Automatic identification via TEDS

--

* DAQP-BRIDGE-A does not have TEDS, therefore it cannot recognize MSI interfaces

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 9, OPTIONs & INTERFACEs | 9-1

9

Options and Interfaces

MSI series interfaces

The DEWE-321x is compatible with MSI series intelligent sensor interfaces. Exactly which MSI interfaces can be used depends entirely on which signal conditioners are installed within your system. The table on the opposite page cross references the compatibility of each MSI with various Dewetron DAQ and MDAQ series signal conditioners, so please refer to that table when choosing MSIs for your system.

Several MSIs are available for both bridge series modules and voltage input modules, namely the ACC, V200, and charge adapters.

When you plug in an MSI interface to any of the analog inputs, it should show up automatically on the SETUP screen within DEWESoft, within the AMPLIFIER column.

-

1.

Note - if your MSi interfaces are NOT showing up on the screen as shown above, then there are two possible explanations:

You have not upgraded your software to DEWESoft 7.0 or higher

2. Perhaps MSIs are not activated at the hardware setup level. To remedy this, please click the SETTINGS menu then select HARDWARE SETUP. On the analog page, ensure that the checkbox for MSIs is checked, then click OK to save this setting.

-

Note - please make sure that any conditioners that you have are checkmarked on this screen.

If you are using DEWESoft 7 and have activated MSI interface as described above, and MSI interfaces are still not showing up when plugged into your analog inputs, please contact us for technical support. Be sure to try more than one MSI interface, to rule out a defective MSI interface being the cause of this problem.

9-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MSi Compatibility

When you plug any one of them into the analog inputs, the software will detect it and show its name and serial number on the main channel setup screen, as shown here:

⇒

The only exception to automatic identification within DEWESoft is the DAQP-BRiDGE-A module, which does not have TEDS interface. Therefore, although they will literally work, it is not convenient to use MSi adapters with that signal conditioner. The DAQP-STG-D is a much better choice.

Adapters

ADAP series interfaces are passive adapters, available for various types of signal inputs. Unlike MSI interfaces, they are not controlled under the software, nor do they have a TEDS interface inside. They are strictly passive adapters. A popular one, for example, has a precision 50Ω resistor inside it, wired across the inputs, which serves as a current shunt for 0-20 mA applications.

Following these single function adapters is a table with the most popular adapters for wider applications.

ADAP-BNC-MICRODOT

The DAQP-CHARGE-A module comes with an adapter from microdot connector to BNC, allowing you to connect charge sensors with the small 10-32 microdot connectors to the BNC input. This adapter is also available for purchase for the DAQP-CHARGE-A, or to be used in conjunction with the MSI-BR-

CH-50 and MSI-V-CH-50 charge interfaces.

ADAP-CAN-OPT-ISO

Isolation adapter for one CAN BUS interface. This small interface plugs into a standard DSUB9 CAN BUS interface connector, and provides real isolation between the vehicle CAN bus and the Dewetron CAN interface. This is very often needed in electrically noisy environments, and on military vehicles.

-

Being passive, ADAP series adapters do not show up on the DEWESoft setup screen. However, you can select them manually in many cases, as we will show below.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 9, OPTIONs & INTERFACEs | 9-3

Adapters for various MDAQ and DAQ series modules

MDAQ-SUB-

STG-D

MDAQ-SUB-

BRIDGE-D

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-D

DAQ-SHUNT-1 --

--

--

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-BNC

--

DAQP-LV-B

√

DAQP-LV-

BNC

--

DAQP-LV-D

--

DAQP-STG-D

--

Shunt adapter for 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA measurements, internal precision 50Ω shunt resistor

100 mA input range, 1 W maximum, 1% accuracy banana plug to Dewetron module / banana jacks on sensor side

DAQ-SHUNT-1-BNC

DAQ-SHUNT-3

√

--

√ √ ---√

Shunt adapter for 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA measurements, internal precision 50Ω shunt resistor

100 mA input range, 1 W maximum, 1% accuracy

9-pin DSUB to Dewetron module / BNC jack on sensor side

---√ --

Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)

Current input via 2 x 0.3 meter cables with banana plugs

Voltage output via 2 x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs

--

√

--

DAQ-SHUNT-4 ---√ --

Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)

Current input via 2 x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2 x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs

---

DAQ-SHUNT-5

CONN-DSUB-9

ADAP-MDAQ-BNC

ADAP-DAQ-BNC

--

√ √

--√ --

Shunt box for measurements up to 5A (0.1 Ω, ±0.1%, 3W)

Current input via 2 x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2 x safety banana jacks

√ ----

--

√

--

√

Mating connector for 9-pin DSUB connectors with convenient screw terminals inside

Eliminates soldering/desoldering

√ √ √ ------

Converter from 9-pin DSUB to BNC input connector, for MDAQ series modules

(pin-outs are the same as ADAP-DAQ-BNC, but there is an additional isolation resistor in this adapter to improve noise performance of differential MDAQ series modules)

------√ √

Converter from 9-pin DSUB to BNC input connector, for DAQ series modules

9-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Adapters for various MDAQ and DAQ series modules

MDAQ-SUB-

STG-D

MDAQ-SUB-

BRIDGE-D

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-D

ADAP-BAN-BNC ----

MDAQ-SUB-

V200-BNC

√

DAQP-LV-B not needed

DAQP-LV-

BNC

√

DAQP-LV-D

--

DAQP-STG-D

--

Adapter from banana jack to BNC.

Allows you to connect your cables with banana plugs into Dewetron modules which have BNC input connectors.

ADAP-MIC-BNC-

CBL

ADAP-BR-1/4-120

ADAP-BR-1/4-350

---√ -√ --not needed

Microphone adapter and 6 ft BNC cable. Allows the use of standard unpowered mics with your Dewetron system.

Adapter: 3 Pin XLR Male to BNC Female Audio Adapter

Contacts (XLR) : 3 Genders: BNC (Female) / XLR (Male) Wired: Pin 1 & 3 = Ground / Pin 2 = Hot

Includes 6 ft BNC-BNC cable (not shown in picture here)

√ -----not needed not needed √ --

Bridge completion terminal, 1/4 bridge @ 120 Ω

DSUB9 input and output connectors

----

Bridge completion terminal, 1/4 bridge @ 350 Ω

DSUB9 input and output connectors

-not needed

Using Adapters in DEWESoft

Since ADAP adapters do not have any kind of electronic interface, they do not show up in the software automatically - you have to set them up yourself. But DEWESoft makes this easy. Simply access the SETUP screen for any channel that you have an adapter plugged into, and enter the appropriate settings and scaling information there.

In the next section we will look at setting up a few popular adapters in the most commonly requested scenarios.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 9, OPTIONs & INTERFACEs | 9-5

Using the DAQ-SHUNT-1 adapter

Let’s take the case of the DAQ-SHUNT-1, which is a 50Ω shunt adapter for making 4-20 mA current measurements. Let’s see how to set it up within a DAQP-LV-B module. When you first open the SETUP dialog for this channel, by default it will be set to the VOLTAGE measurement mode, like this:

Therefore, it is necessary to change the mode from voltage to current, as shown here:

When you do this, the software changes the unit of measure from V to mA, and also presents you with the ability to select Shunt 1, Shunt 2 (Shunt 2 applies to Shunt 3, Shunt4, and Shunt 5, which are the same electrically, but which only have different I/O connector configurations), as well as a variety of Dewetron specialized shunts for automotive applications:

Simply select the shunt that is appropriate. In this case, when you choose Shunt 1, DEWESoft will automatically scale the input. And notice that the measuring ranges are now given directly in mA instead of voltage units.

9-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Have a look at the range selector:

Therefore you can simply select the 20 mA range, and there is no need to do any other scaling unless you need to convert the 20 mA signal to something else.

For instance, if your 4 - 20 mA signal really represents -100 to 5000 PSI, you could enter these scaling values quite easily on this same screen. First change the Units from mA to PSI, then below in the Scaling area, enter these values:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 9, OPTIONs & INTERFACEs | 9-7

That’s all you would have to do! Any scaling parameters which are linear can be entered in this way.

-

Note: the ranges shown above apply to the DAQP-Lv module. When you use the DAQ-SHUNT-1 with other modules, the ranges will be different according to which module is being used.

Using custom Shunt resistors

After selecting CURRENT input type you can also select CUSTOM instead of one of the preset current adapters, at the end of the list:

When you do this, the software allows you to enter the value of the shunt resistor that you are using, as well as the maximum wattage. The software will do the appropriate ohm’s law calculations to amperage for you automatically.

-

Note - Dewetron conditioners such as the MDAQ-SUB-BRiDGE and MDAQ-SUB-STG also support the direct selection of CURRENT as a measuring type. Therefore you can use them with shunts as shown above.

You simply need to adapt the input connector to handle a shunt resistor. An idea choice is the CONN-

DSUB-9 mating connector, which makes it easy to insert your own shunt resistor into the mating connector and plug it into the DSUB 9-pin input connector of the module.

9-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Using Current sensors

In this case we recommend that you leave the Measurement type to Voltage, and simply enter the appropriate engineering units and scaling factor. For example, if you were using a current clamp that could measure 250 Amps, but which output 0.1 V/A, you would simply set up this channel like this:

After you set the Units to A, then enter the scaling factors as shown above so that 0.1 V = 1 A, simply use the

Range selector to choose the appropriate current measuring range. Keep an eye on the right side of the scaling

BAR in the bottom left corner of the screen. Notice that when you select the 25V measuring range, you will get a full scale 250 A measuring range. This is perfect. You can select smaller ranges if you expect that the current input will not really reach 250 A. Choose the range that best fits to your current sensor AND the desired measuring range.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 9, OPTIONs & INTERFACEs | 9-9

Using the ADAP-BR-1/4-120 or 350 bridge completion adapters

These adapters are only needed for Dewetron bridge conditioners which do not have internal completion for

1/4 bridge sensors. Therefore they are not needed by the DAQP-STG, DAQP-BRIDGE-A, DAQP-BRIDGE-A, or

MDAQ-SUB-STG-D, because these all support full bridge, half bridge and quarter bridge with internal completion for many bride wiring scenarios.

However, these adapters to apply to Dewetron conditioners that lack 1/4 bridge completion, including the MDAQ-

SUB-BRIDGE-D (full and half bridge inputs), as well as the inputs of the DEWE-43, DEWE-101, and DEWE-

3213 (full bridge inputs).

Select the full bridge mode of the MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE, and then plug in the completion adapter.

This is less convenient than using a more capable signal conditioner, not only because of the external adapter, but because you cannot use the balance buttons in this mode. But it serves to adapt this less capable conditioner to handle 1/4 bridge sensors.

9-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

General DAQ/PAD module specifications

Module dimensions: 20 x 65 x 105 mm (0.79 x 2.56 x 4.13 in.)

(W x H x D without front cover and connectors)

Front cover:

Environmental:

Temp. range storage:

20 x 87 x 2 mm (0.79 x 3.43 x 0.08 in.)

(W x H x D without connector)

-30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)

Temp. range operating: -5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F)

Rel. humidity (MIL202): 0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing

RFI susceptibility: ±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

DAQ Series Common information

Calibration information

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

„

„

„

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

RS-232/485 interface

DAQP modules can be configured via RS-485 interface, PAD modules require this interface for all data transfers The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include an internal RS-232/485 converter and interface. This converter allows communication with all Dewetron signal conditioning modules. To communicate with the modules, the RS-

232 interface must be set to the following parameters: baud rate: 9600 data bits: 8 parity: no parity stop bits: 1 handshake: not required

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-1

10

signal Conditioners

There are several series of Dewetron signal conditioners that may be installed in your system in many possible combinations. This section presents technical information about each of these series:

Module series

DAQ series Modules

PAD series Modules

MDAQ series Modules

DEWE-3210 series

Directly plug in, user exchangeable

Directly plug in, user exchangeable

Can be added externally

EPAD2 series Modules

CPAD2 series Modules

DEWE-43 Modules

Can be added externally

Can be added externally

N/A

Above: cross reference of module types and chassis compatibility

DEWE-3211 series

Can be added externally

Can be added externally

Factory installed, not user exchangeable

Can be added externally

Can be added externally

N/A

DEWE-3213 series

Can be added externally

Can be added externally

Can be added externally

Can be added externally

Can be added externally

Can be added externally (up to 4)

Further technical information can be found in the Dewetron Modules Technical Reference, a separate document.

DAQ Series Modules

DAQ Module Connectors

Front Panel Connector

Rear Connector

Accessible to the user. The connector type and pin assignment varies from module to module. Detailed pin assignment of each module is shown in the appropriate module description.

Not user accessible. 9-pin male SUB-D, interface to the Dewetron System.

10-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MODULE INPUT TYPE RANGES TEDS

High Voltage Measurement

DAQP-HV

V

DAQP-HV-S3

High voltage

±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400,

±800, ±1400 V

N/A

V

DAQP-DMM

High voltage

±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400,

±800, ±1400 V

N/A

High voltage

V

Low/Medium Voltage & Current Measurement

DAQP-LV

Voltage, current with external shunt or current sensor

±10, ±40, ±100, ±200, ±400,

±1000 V

N/A

±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200,

±500 mV

±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50 V

±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200,

±500 mV

±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10 V N/A

IEPE via MSI-

V-ACC

V

PT100, Pt200,

Pt500, Pt1000,

Pt2000 and resistance via MSI-

V-RTD

-200 to 1000 C and 0 to 6.5 kOhm

DAQP-V

V

Voltage, current with external shunt or current sensor

±10, ±100 mV

±1, ±5, ±10, ±50 V

N/A

DAQP-LA-SC

Current

Note: 5Arms continuous

±0.1, ±0.3, ±1, ±3 A

±10 A peak, ±30 A peak max 5Arms continuous current

N/A

DAQP-LA-B

Current

Note: intended for 4-20 mA applications

±2, ±6, ±20 mA

±60 mA, ±200 mA, ±0.6A max 0.6 A

N/A

BANDWIDTh (BW)

FILTERS (LP / hP)

ISOLATION (ISO)

OvER-vOLTAGE

PROTECTION (OP)

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: 1.8 kVrms

(line-to-line)

BW: 700 kHz

BW: 20/30 kHz

LP: 10, 100, Hz

1, 2, 20/30 kHz

BW: 50 kHz

LP: 10, 100 Hz

1, 10, 50 kHz

ISO: 1.8 kVrms

(line-to-line)

ISO: 1.5 kVrms

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: up to 1 kVrms

(with banana jacks)

OP: 350 VDC

ISO: up to 1 kVrms

OP: ±500 VDC or

350 Vrms

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: 1.4 kVrms

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: 1.4 kVrms

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-3

MODULE INPUT TYPE RANGES TEDS

Bridge / Strain Gage Measurement

DAQP-STG

Strain gages, bridge sensors, voltages

DAQP-BRIDGE-A

DAQP-BRIDGE-B

DAQP-CFB

Pot/Ohmic sensors

Thermocouple via

MSR-BR-TH series

Strain gages, bridge sensors

Pot/Ohmic sensors

Thermocouple via

MSR-BR-TH series

Strain gages, bridge sensors

Pot/Ohmic sensors

Thermocouple via

MSR-BR-TH series

AC bridge, strain gage, carrier sensors

Bridge:

Voltage:

Resistance/ohms

Full range of thermocouple type

±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50 mV/V

(@ 5 Vdc excitation)

200 ohm to 10 kohm

Full range of thermocouple type

±0.1, ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1, ±2, ±5,

±10, ±20, ±50, ±100 mV/V

(@ 5 Vdc excitation)

200 ohm to 10 kohm

Full range of thermocouple type

Bridge: 0.1 to 1000 mV/V

Inductive: 5 to 1000 mV/V

N/A

Yes

N/A

Inductive/ LVDT sensors

Voltage: 0.2 to 1000 mV/ vrms

Charge / IEPE Measurement

DAQP-ACC-A

IEPE sensors

±50, ±166, ±500 mV; ±1.66,

±5 V (Gain: 1, 3, 10, 30, 100)

Yes

DAQP-CHARGE-A

IEPE and charge sensors

Note: selectable integration and double integration

Charge: 5, 50, 500, 5000,

50000 pC

IEPE: ±5, ±50, ±500 mV,

±5 V

(0, 20, 40, 60 dB)

N/A

DAQP-CHARGE-B

Charge sensors

Note: selectable time constant for static charge sensors

±100, ±500, ±2 000, ±10

000,

±40 000, ±200 000, ±1 000

000 pC

N/A

BANDWIDTh (BW)

FILTERS (LP / hP)

ISOLATION (ISO)

OvER-vOLTAGE

PROTECTION (OP)

BW: 300 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300 kHz

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: ±10 VDC

BW: 20 kHz

LP: 10, 100 Hz

1, 5, 20 kHz

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: ±50 VDC

BW: 200 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 200 kHz

ISO: N/A

OP: ±10 VDC

BW: dc to 2.3 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz

1 kHz

ISO: N/A

OP: ±10 VDC

BW: 0.5 Hz to 300 kHz

LP: 1, 10, 100, 300 kHz

HP: 0.5 Hz, 5 Hz

N/A

BW: 0.1 Hz to 50 kHz

LP: 100 Hz; 1, 3, 10,

50 kHz

HP: 0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10 Hz

N/A

BW: 0.5 Hz to 100 kHz

LP: 10, 30, 100, 300 Hz;

1, 3, 10, 30, 100 kHz

HP: DC, 0.0001 Hz to

0.5 Hz

ISO: 350 VDC

10-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MODULE INPUT TYPE RANGES TEDS

Temperature and Universal Measurement

DAQP-THERM

Thermocouple

(universal)

Thermocouple

(universal)

DAQP-MULTI

RTD

V

Voltage

Resistance

Bridge (constant current)

Frequency to Voltage Measurement

DAQP-FREQ-A

Frequency to voltage

Output modules

DAQN-V-OUT

K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U freely programmable within the maximum range of the selected thermocouple type, internal linearization, internal

CJC

N/A

K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U type, internal linearization, freely programmable range, internal CJC

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500,

Pt1000 and Pt2000 sensors, programmable range (2-wire and 4-wire only)

10 ranges from ±5 mV to

± 5 V freely programmable range from 1 Ohm to 1 MOhm

4-wire full bridge sensors,

13 ranges from ±0.5 to 5000 mV/mA

Yes

100, 1k, 5k, 20k, 100k and

200 kHz ranges;

Trigger level range 0 to

130 V,

Additional TTL output

(isolated pulse output of input signal)

N/A

Analog output

1:1 output module, from 0 to

±10 V; Accuracy ±0.05 %

Connector choices: banana,

BNC, or 9-pin DSUB connector

N/A

OUT

BANDWIDTh (BW)

FILTERS (LP / hP)

ISOLATION (ISO)

OvER-vOLTAGE

PROTECTION (OP)

BW: 3 kHz

LP: 3Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz,

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz

Butterworth or Bessel;

2nd, 4th, 6th, or 8th order

(programmable)

ISO: ±1000 Vrms continuous

BW: 3 kHz

LP: 3Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz,

100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz

Butterworth or Bessel;

2nd, 4th, 6th, or 8th order programmable

ISO: 1000 Vrms continuous (for input, excitation and TEDS interface)

BW: 200 kHz

Selectable input and output filters (rangedependent)

BW: 400 Hz

ISO: 350 Vrms

ISO: CMV output to input, continuous:

1500 VRMS max

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-5

Adding DAQ (or HSi) modules to your Dewtetron system:

DAQ modules can be plugged directly into the DEWE-3210, because it has 8 slots for DAQ/PAD/HSI series plugin modules. But if you don’t want to add more DAQ modules, you can simply add a DEWE-30 series chassis. The typical DEWE-3210 has a 16-channel A/D card inside it already, and the first 8 channels are wired to the 8 x DAQ slots on the left side of the DEWE-3210.

The other 8 channels are wired to the EXPANSION LEMO connector on the side of the DEWE-3210 near the modules. Therefore, you may easily connect a DEWE-30-8 chassis with 8 more DAQ (or PAD or HSI) modules in it, using the appropriate cable. It is expecially convenient to use the expansion version of the DEWE-30-8 chassis, because then it will also be powered from the DEWE-3210 mainframe, and a single cable will connect power, the analog outputs from the external modules, and the RS485 interface for module control. When you run the software, all 16 modules will show up on the SETUP screen just as if they were all built into the DEWE-3210!

This method also allows the DEWE-3211 to utilze DAQ series modules, since this model does not have any slots on its chassis. DEWE-30 series chassis are available with 4, 8, 16, 32, 48, or 64 slots, while DEWE-50-PCI series chassis are available with 16, 32, or 64 slots.

Typical DEWE-3210 hook-ups:

„

Installing 8 modules directly into the DEWE-3210:

„

Adding a DEWE-30-8 expansion rack, for accessing 16 total channels:

„

Adding a DEWE-30-8 expansion rack, plus another 16 slot DEWE-30-16 rack, for a total of 32 DAQ modules:

Analog/

RS485

Analog/

Power/

RS485

The DEWE-30-16 requires that an additional 16-ch A/D card be added into the DEWE-3210 mainframe!

Analog/

Power/

RS485

10-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Addressing DAQ modules

Each DAQ module must have a unique address (just like HSI, PAD, and other modules). The address is stored inside the DAQ module in non-volatile memory. Therefore, if you remove a DAQ module from one system, where it was set to address 31, and plug it into a different Dewetron chassis, it will still report itself on the bus at address 31.

This can cause a conflict if you already have a module at this address. In addition, it will be confusing to you when you hook up your signals to what you believe is DAQ module at address 16, but the channels show up on address 31. Therefore, it is vitally important that you set the addresses of any DAQ, PAD, or HSI modules that you plug into your Dewetron system.

-

There is no need to set the addresses of MDAQ modules, except when initially installed at the factory.

There are essentially two ways to address your modules:

„

FILL RACK PROCEDURE - this addresses all of your modules in sequence. This is what you should do if you have been changing more than one module around, to ensure that every module is at the appropriate and unique address.

„

FILL ONE MODULE PROCEDURE - easier and faster, when you simply want to exchange one module.

Let’s look at how to do each one of the above procedures:

Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure

Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. Now click on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN and you will see this menu:

Select the FILL RACK option, and the software will prompt you like this:

Follow the instruction to press the TOP black button on the module in the first slot, which is always SLOT 0 in the case of doing a FILL RACK, since you are starting at 0 and going all the way up, filling all modules.

When you press this button on the module, the system will beep and prompt you to press the next module’s button, and so on.

Continue all the way through until you have done the last module, then press CANCEL to complete and save your changes.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-7

If you get to the position where there is an empty module slot, or a non-programmable module from the old days in that slot, press the SKIP button to move past it to the next module. You can do this as many times as needed.

When you’re done, the rack should be filled with all of the modules that are physically installed within this system, like this:

FILL (or CLEAR) One Module Procedure

FILL RACK is a great way to ensure that your modules are all addressed correctly, and we highly recommend it if you make several module exchanges at once. But there are times when you simply want to exchange one module with a different one, or perhaps to just remove a module. This is also quite easy once you know how.

Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. This time, instead of clicking on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN, double-click the amplifier column for the one module that you want to add, delete, or exchange. When you do this, the software will give you a similar choice as before:

And your choices are:

„

„

„

„

If you have plugged a new module into this slot, choose FILL, then follow the prompts.

If you change you mind and want to do a FILL RACK anyway, starting at slot 0, choose FILL FROM #0, then follow the prompts.

If there is a module in this slot that you have removed, but it continues to show up in RED (because the software cannot really find it), choose CLEAR to remove it from the list.

If you have clicked this by accident and want to cancel without making any changes, choose CANCEL

10-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Module Installation Trouble-shooting

There may be times when you have trouble addressing your modules, for a variety of reasons. Here are some good tips for solving these issues:

Problem: some or all modules are showing up in RED letters.

Analysis: a module shown in RED letters on the setup screen tells you that the software cannot find this module. Or, it can mean that there is a conflict with another module, like when you plug two modules with the same address into the system at the same time and don’t do a FILL RACK or FILL (or CLEAR) one of them. A very rare condition might be that a module is defective and cannot communicate properly.

Solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.

If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL

ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

Problem: you plug in a new module into a previously unused slot, but it does not show up.

Analysis: more than likely it was already set to an address that you were using, and it has either taken another module’s address, or is conflicting with it.

Solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.

If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL

ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

Problem: you want to use a very old PAD module which does not have the upper black button on it, so you don’t know how to address it

Analysis: These modules have been out of production for a long time, but there are still some around, and they are still perfectly good modules.

Solution: Start with the old PAD module in the slot, but NOT PRESSED IN!! Make sure the connector on the inside is not mated or making contact in any way. Now double click on the amplifier slot where you want to install this module. Select FILL when prompted. Then when the next prompt appears to press the black button or push in the module... PUSH IN THE MODULE.

The green LED on its front panel should light up, and it should show up on the list on your SETUP screen.

Problem: some modules show up with the SERIAL NUMBERS in the amplifier column, and some do not.

Analysis: There is nothing wrong here. With each Dewetron module there is a certain revision before which the serial number was not available for external query, so these modules will not show this information on the setup screen.

Solution: N/A

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-9

10-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-HV (and -S3) Isolated High Voltage module (300/700 kHz)

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

7 ranges (±20 V to ±1400 V)

300 kHz (version DAQP-HV-S3: 700 kHz)

1.8 kVRMS line to line 1.4 kVRMS line to ground

Banana sockets (S3 = Screw terminals)

V

DAQP-Hv Specifications

Parameter

Input ranges unipolar and bipolar:

DC accuracy:

20 V and 50 V

100 V to 1400 V

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Offset drift:

Long term stability:

Input resistance:

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filter selection:

Filter (lowpass):

Filter type:

Typical SFDR and SNR:

Typical CMRR:

Isolation voltage

Protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power supply:

DAQP-HV

20 V, 50 V, 100 V, 200 V, 400 V, 800 V, 1400 V

±0.05 % of reading ±40mV

±0.05 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

0.03%

Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 50 ppm/°K)

20 V to 100 V

200 V to 1400 V

50 V:

200 V:

1400 V: typical 0.5mV/°K max. 4mV/°K typical 5ppm/°K max. 20 ppm of Range/°K

100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)

10 MΩ

300 kHz

Push button or software

10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz

1)

Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade

300 kHz 100 kHz 10 kHz

SFDR

98

98

98

SNR SFDR SNR SFDR SNR

76 dB 101 81 dB 108 90 dB

84 dB 101 89 dB 108 91 dB

86 dB 102 91 dB 107 92 dB

Surge (1.2/50)

Burst(5kHz)

>80 dB @ 50 Hz

70 dB @ 400 Hz

60 dB @ 1 kHz

48 dB @ 10 kHz

Line to Ground 1.4kVrms

Line to Line 1.8kVrms

CAT III 600

CAT IV 300

±4000V

±4000V

±5 V

<10 Ohm

5 mA

Short to ground for 10 sec.

±9 VDC ± 1%

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-11

Parameter

Power consumption:

Power On default settings:

RS485 interface for module control:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

DAQP-HV

0.7 W

Software programable

Yes

N/A

N/A

1) The 300 kHz filter setting applies only to the Bessell filter type

Signal hook-up

DAQP-HV: The insulated banana jacks are the signal connection point. Use only mating cables which have molded insulated/safety type plugs. These plugs should be the kind which prevent you from coming into contact with high voltages or currents.

DAQP-HV-S3: The insulated screw terminal panels are the signal connection point. Always make your connections before applying voltage to them.

⇒

Use only insulated cables and the appropriate mating plugs or connectors when using this module!

⇒

Never handle cables when high voltage is applied! Connect your signal points before applying high voltage!

⇒

Failure to observe safety protocols can result in equipment damage, and personal injury or even death!

⇒

Always check that positive and negative lines are connected with the correct polarity on the DAQP-Hv and DAQP-Hv-S3 module, and at the signal source side.

⇒

⇒

Use of red (+) and black (-) color coded cables is highly recommended.

High voltages can be lethal! Observe all safety protocols at all times.

10-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-DMM Isolated High Voltage Module (20/30 kHz)

Voltage input:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal input:

6 ranges (±10 V to ±1000 V)

30 kHz maximum

1500 VRMS

Insulated banana jacks

DAQP-DMM Specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Range selection:

DC accuracy:

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Input resistance:

Bandwidth (-3 dB ±1.5 dB @ f0)

10 V to 40 V range

100 V to 200 V range

400 V to 1000 V range

Filter selection:

Filter:

Filter characteristics

@ 0.01, 0.1, 1, 3 kHz

@ 30 kHz

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth

10 V range

100 V range

1000 V range

Typical CMRR:

Isolation voltage:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

RS-485 interface for module control:

DAQP-DMM

±10, ±40, ±100, ±200, ±400, ±1000 V

Pushbutton or software command

0.1 % of reading ±0.1 % of range

Better than ±0.03 %

Typ. 20 ppm/°K, max. 40 ppm/°K

10 MOhm (±0.1 %)

Typical 20 kHz

Typical 25 kHz

30 kHz

Pushbutton or software command

10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Butterworth 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)

60 dB

76 dB

81 dB

73 dB @ 0 Hz

70 dB @ 50 Hz

57 dB @ 400 Hz

1.5 kVRMS

±5 V

<10 Ohm

5 mA max.

Continuous short to ground

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.65 W typical

Yes

V

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-13

Parameter

TEDS support:

MSI support:

DAQP-DMM

N/A

N/A

Signal hook-up

DAQP-DMM: The insulated banana jacks are the signal connection point. Use only mating cables which have molded insulated/safety type plugs. These plugs should be the kind which prevent you from coming into contact with high voltages or currents.

⇒

Use only insulated cables and the appropriate mating plugs or connectors when using this module!

⇒

Never handle cables when high voltage is applied! Connect your signal points before applying high voltage!

⇒

Failure to observe safety protocols can result in equipment damage, and personal injury or even death!

⇒

Always check that positive and negative lines are connected with the correct polarity on the DAQP-DMM module, and at the signal source side.

⇒

⇒

Use of red (+) and black (-) color coded cables is highly recommended.

High voltages can be lethal! Observe all safety protocols at all times.

10-14 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-LV Isolated Low Voltage Module (300 kHz)

Voltage input:

Current input:

Bandwidth:

12 ranges (10 mV to 50 V)

±20 mA using DAQ-SHUNT-1 (option)

±5 A using DAQ-SHUNT-4 or DAQ-SHUNT-5

300 kHz

Isolation: 350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)

Additional signal input types using MSI interfaces:

IEPE

RTD

CHARGE

Constant current powered sensors (accels,mics);

12 ranges (10 mV to 5 V); requires MSI-V-ACC

Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000)

9 resistance ranges (8 to 4000 Ω); requires MSI-V-RTD

Charge up to 50000 pC requires MSI-V-CHA-50

V

DAQP-Lv Specifications

Parameter

Input ranges unipolar and bipolar:

Push button selectable ranges:

DC accuracy:

Input coupling:

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Offset drift:

Long term stability:

Input resistance:

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filter selection:

Filter:

Filter type:

Typical SFDR and SNR:

Typical CMRR:

Input overvoltage protection:

Isolation voltage:

Sensor supply:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Bipolar:

Unipolar:

10 mV to 200 mV:

500 mV to 50 V:

20 mV

1V

50 V

DAQP-LV

10 mV, 20 mV, 50 mV, 100 mV, 200 mV, 500 mV, 1 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V, 25 V, 50 V

10 mV, 50 mV, 200 mV, 1 V, 5 V, 10 V, 50 V

Range Accuracy

10 mV to 50 mV ±0.02 % of reading ±40 μV

100 mV to 50 V ±0.02 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

10 mV to 50 mV ±0.04 % of reading ±40 μV

100 mV to 50 V ±0.04 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

DC or AC software selectable (1.5 Hz standard, cust.on request down to 0.01 Hz)

0.01 % of full scale

Typically 10 ppm/°K (max. 20 ppm/°K)

Uni- and bipolar

3 μV/°K

10 ppm of Range/°K

100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)

1 MOhm

300 kHz

Push button or software

10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz

1)

Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade

300kHz bandwidth 100 kHz bandwidth 10 kHz bandwidth

SFDR

100 dB

102 dB

102 dB

SNR SFDR SNR SFDR SNR

72 dB 98 dB 76 dB 97 dB 84 dB

82 dB 99 dB 93 dB 97 dB 96 dB

82 dB 99 dB 93 dB 97 dB 96 dB

10 mV to 1 V range: 2.5 V to 50 V range:

>100 dB @ 50 Hz 90 dB @ 50 Hz

>100 dB @ 1 kHz 65 dB @ 1 kHz

83 dB @ 10 kHz 55 dB @ 10 kHz

350 VDC

350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)

±9 V (±1 %), 12 V (±5 %), 200mA resettable fuse protected

2)

±5 V

<10 Ohm

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-15

maximum Output current:

Output protection:

Power On default settings

Power supply:

Power consumption:

RS-485 interface for module control:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

5 mA

Short to ground for 10 sec.

Software programable

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.8 W without sensor supply

Yes

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433, DS2431 3)

MSI-V-ACC; MSI-V-RTD; MSI-V-CHA-50

(1) 300 kHz exclusively for Bessel filter characteristic (2) Overall current should not exceed Dewetron mainframe’s maximum power.

(3) TEDS is only available on the -D and -L versions

DAQP-Lv Signal Hook-up

DAQP-V-B model with banana jacks

DAQP-V-BNC model with BNC connector

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

DAQP-LV-D pin-outs

Standard 9-pin DSUB connector

Pin

1

Description

TEDS

IN +

Reserved for custom sensor supplies

GND (not isolated)

+9 V (200 mA max.)

+12 V (200 mA max.)

IN -

Reserved for custom sensor supplies

-9 V (200 mA max.)

DAQP-V-D model with DSUB connector

DAQP-V-L model with LEMO connector

See table >

4

5

2

3

6

7

DAQP-LV-L pin-outs

LEMO EGG.1B.307

Pin

1

Description

IN +

IN -

+9 V (200 mA max.)

-9 V (200 mA max.)

GND

+12 V (200 mA max.)

TEDS

⇒

⇒

iMPORTANT: Always observe all safety protocols when handling live voltages!

Use pins 4, 5 and 9 only as NON-iSOLATED sensor supply voltages

⇒

if signals above 60 v may appear, don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector

10-16 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-LV: Typical sensor connections

Sensor with differential output, module powered Current measurement using external shunt

Current loop-powered measurement with external shunt

Sensor with common ground

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-17

DAQP-LV: Shunt Options

There are several current shunts that are available for this module, which can handle currents up to 5A. For higher currents, please use a rated CLAMP or FLEX COIL or other current transformer which has a voltage output.

Model Input Range Accuracy Description

100 mA 0.1%

50 Ω shunt adapter (1 W)

Compatible with all Dewetron voltage modules and break-out boxes with banana jacks

DAQ-SHUNT-1

DAQ-SHUNT-1R

DAQ-SHUNT-4

100 mA

5A

0.1%

±0.1% < 10 ppm

50 Ω shunt adapter (1 W)

(This is the resistor from the DAQ-SHUNT-1 option above - for user mounting/integration)

100 mΩ Shunt box

Current input via 2x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2x 0.3 meter cable with banana plugs

100 mΩ Shunt box

Current input via 2x safety banana jacks

Voltage output via 2x safety banana jacks

DAQ-SHUNT-5

5A ±0.1% < 10 ppm

10-18 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-V Isolated Low Voltage Module (50 kHz)

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connectors:

DAQP-v Specifications

6 ranges from ±10 mV to ±50 V

50 kHz

350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)

-B: Safety banana sockets

-BNC: BNC connector

-D: 9-pin SUB-D connector

-L: 8-pin LEMO connector (option)

V

Parameter

Input ranges:

Range Selection:

DC accuracy:

10 mV range

100 mV range

1 V to 50 V ranges

Input coupling:

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Input resistance:

Bandwidth (-3 dB):

Filters (low-pass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

@ 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10 kHz

@ 50 kHz

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth

10 mV range

10 V range

50 V range

Typical CMRR:

Isolation voltage:

Sensor supply:

Output voltage:

Output resistance: maximum Output current:

Output protection:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

RS-485 interface:

DAQP-V

±10, ±100 mV, ±1, ±5, ±10, ±50 V

Push button or software

0.05 % of reading ±40 μV

0.05 % of reading ±100 μV

0.05 % of reading ±0.05 % of range

DC fixed

Better than ±0.03%

Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 40 ppm/°K)

1 MOhm (±0.1 %)

50 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Pushbutton or software command

Butterworth

40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)

61 dB

78 dB

78 dB

90 dB @ 0 Hz

78 dB @ 50 Hz

60 dB @ 400 Hz

350 VDC (1 kVRMS with banana connector)

±9 V (±1 %), 12 V (±5 %)

±5 V

<10 Ohm

5 mA

Continuous short to ground

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.85 W typical without sensor supply

Yes

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-19

Parameter

TEDS:

Supported TEDS chips:

Supported MSI

DAQP-v Signal Hook-up

DAQP-V-B model with banana jacks

DAQP-V

N/A

N/A

N/A

DAQP-V-BNC model with BNC connector

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

DAQP-V-D model with DSUB connector

DAQP-V-L model with LEMO connector

6

7

4

5

8

2

3

DAQP-V-D pin-outs

Standard 9-pin DSUB connector

Pin

1

Description

Not connected

IN +

Not connected

GND (not isolated) reserved for +9 V sensor supply

+12 V sensor supply (200 mA max.)

IN -

Not connected

9 reserved for -9 V sensor supply

4

5

2

3

6

7

DAQP-V-L pin-outs

LEMO EGG.1B.307

Pin

1

Description

IN +

IN -

+9 V sensor supply

-9 V sensor supply

GND

+12 V sensor supply not connected

⇒

⇒

iMPORTANT: Always observe all safety protocols when handling live voltages!

Use pins 4, 5 and 9 only as NON-iSOLATED sensor supply voltages

⇒

if signals above 60 v may appear, don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector

-

For sensor hook-up guidance and shunt resistor information, please refer to the DAQP-Lv module

(except that TEDS is not available on the DAQP-v module)

10-20 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-LA and LA-SC Isolated Current Module

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection: -SC: screw terminals

DAQP-LA-SC: 0.1 A, 0.3 A, 1 A, 3 A, 10 A peak, 30 A peak

DAQP-LA-B-S1: 2 mA, 6 mA, 20 mA, 60 mA, 200 mA, 0.6 A

300 kHz

1.4 kVRMS Input to ground

-B-S1: insultated banana jacks

DAQP-LA Specifications

Parameter

Input resistance (Shunt):

Shunt inductance:

Input ranges:

Continuous current:

Peak current:

DC accuracy:

100 mA and 300 mA

1 A to 30 A

DAQP-LA-SC

0.1 Ω

<10 nH

0.1 A, 0.3 A, 1 A, 3 A, 10 A peak, 30 A peak max. 5 Arms

30 A max. 10 ms; 10 A max. 100 ms

±0.05 % of reading ±200 μA ±0.05 % of reading

±0.05 % of range

DAQP-LA-B-S1

5 Ω

<10 nH

2 mA, 6 mA, 20 mA, 60 mA, 200 mA, 0.6 A max. 0.6 A

Offset drift

Gain linearity:

Gain drift range:

Long term stability:

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filter selection:

Filter:

Filter type:

Typical SFDR and SNR:

Protection:

Isolation voltage:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

2 mA and 6 mA

20 mA and 600 mA

100 mA and 300 mA

1 A to 30 A

2 mA and 6 mA

20 mA to 600 mA

100 mA

1A

30 A

±0.05 % of reading ±4 μA ±0.05 % of reading

±0.05 % of range typ. max.

12

20

20

40

μA/°K ppm of Range/°K typ . max.

0.24 0.4 μA/°K

20 40 ppm of Range/°K

0.03 %

Typically 20 ppm/°K (max. 50 ppm/°K)

100 ppm/sqrt (1000 hrs)

300 kHz

Push button or software

10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 300 kHz 1)

Bessel or Butterworth 40 dB/decade

300kHz bandwidth 100 kHz bandwidth 10 kHz bandwidth

SFDR

95 dB

102 dB

104 dB

SNR SFDR SNR SFDR SNR

64 dB 95 dB 67dB 95 dB 77 dB

82 dB 103 dB 85 dB 113 dB 90 dB

89 dB 103 dB 89 dB 117 dB 91 dB

CAT III 150 V

CAT IV 100 V

Input to Ground 1.4 kVRMS

±5 V

<10 Ohm

5 mA

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-21

Output protection:

Power On default settings

Power supply:

Power consumption:

RS-485 interface:

TEDS:

Supported TEDS chips:

Supported MSI

(1) 300 kHz exclusively for Bessel filter

DAQP-LA Signal Hook-up

DAQP-LA-B-xx model with banana jacks

Short to ground for 10 sec.

Software programable

±9 VDC ± 1%

0.7 W

Yes

N/A

N/A

N/A

DAQP-LA-SC model with screw terminal connectors

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

⇒

iMPORTANT: Always observe all safety protocols when handling live voltages!

10-22 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-STG Isolated Universal Input Module

Strain gauge, bridge sensors: ±0.1 to ±1000 mV/V (@ 5 VDC excitation)

Piezoresistive bridge: ±0.5 to ±10000 mV/mA (@ 1 mA excitation)

Voltage input:

RTD:

Resistance:

Isolation:

Signal input connection:

±500 μV to ±10 V

Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000)

9 resistance ranges (8 to 4000 Ω)

25 mΩ to 100 kΩ

350 VDC

9-pin SUB-D connector (standard) or LEMO (optional)

Additional signal input using MSI interfaces:

IEPE

THERMOCOUPLE

CHARGE

VOLTAGE

Constant current powered sensors (accelerometers, mics);

12 ranges (±2.5 mV to 10 V); requires MSI-V-ACC

Popular T/C types; requires MSI-BR-TH-J, -K, or -T

Charge sensors up to 50000 pC requires MSI-V-CH-50 up to ±200 V requires MSI-BR-V-200

DAQP-STG specifications

V

Parameter

Gain:

Voltage Input ranges: Sensitivity @ 5 VDC excitation:

Resistance:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Voltage Input Accuracy:

Gain drift

Offset drift

Linearity

Excitation voltage:

Accuracy

Drift

Current limit

Protection

Excitation current:

Accuracy

Drift

Compliance voltage

Output impedance

Supported Sensors:

Bridge resistance:

Shunt calibration:

Shunt and completion resistor accuracy:

Automatic bridge balance:

Bandwidth (-3dB):

Filters (low pass):

DAQP-STG

0.5 to 10 000

±0.5 , ±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2V, ±5 V,±10 V ±0.1 , ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1,

±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50, ±100, ±200, ±400, ±1000 mV/V

25 mOhm to 100 kOhm

>100 MOhm (power off: 50 kOhm)

3.5 nV * √Hz

±0.05 % of reading ± 0.02 % of range ±10 μV typical 10 ppm/°K max. 20 ppm/°K typical 0.3 μV/°K + 10 ppm of range, max 2 μV/°K + 20 ppm of range typical 0.02 %

0, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5,10 and 12 VDC software programmable (16 Bit DAC)

±0.03 % ±1 mV

±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K

100 mA

Continuous short to ground

0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10 and 20mA software programmable (16 Bit DAC)

0.05% ±2μA

15ppm/°K

12V

>1 MOhm

4- or 6-wire full bridge 3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable)

3- or 4-wire 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ohm (software programmable)1) 4-wire full bridge with constant current excitation (piezoresistive bridge sensors) Potentiometric Resistance

Resistance Temperature Detection: PT100 PT200 PT500 PT1000

80 Ohm to 10 kOhm @ ≤ 5 VDC excitation

Two internal shunt resistors 59.88 kOhm and 175 kOhm

0.05% ±15ppm/°K

Input range 500μV to 1V: ±200 % of Range

2.5V to 5V: ±40% of Range

300 kHz

10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

V

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-23

Parameter

Filter characteristics:

Typical SNR @ 100 kHz [1 kHz] and 5 VDC excitation:

Typical CMRR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and 5 VDC excitation:

Isolation

Common mode Voltage

Over voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

RS-485 interface:

TEDS support:

MSI support:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Module Pin-outs

DAQP-STG

10Hz to 100Hz:

300kHz:

66 dB [84 dB] @ 1 mV/V

82 dB [100 dB] @ 50 mV/V

Butterworth or Bessel 40 dB/dec ( 2nd order)

Bessel 60 dB/dec (3rd order)

160 dB [160 dB] @ DC

115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz

110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

±350 VDC continuous (for input, excitation and TEDS interface)

±350 VDC input to housing

±50 VDC input (+) to input (-)

±5 V

< 1 Ohm

Max. 5 mA; short to ground protected for 10 seconds

Yes

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2431, DS2432, DS2433

MSI-BR-TH-x, MSI-BR-ACC, MSI-BR-V-200 ,MSI-BR-CH-50

±9 VDC (±1 %)

Typ. 1.7 W @ 350 Ohm, 2.15 W @ 120 Ohm (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation)

Absolute max.: 3 W (maximum excitation @ maximum current)

⇒

CAUTiON: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the housing of the

9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

10-24 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-STG-D Cables and Shielding

To reduce the influence of electromagnetic disturbances, shielded twisted pair cables are recommended. Connect the shield to the isolated GND (Pin4) to get the best result.

The twisted pairs for full bridge, half bridge, voltage and resistance mode are:

Twisted pair 1

Twisted pair 2

Twisted pair 3

Twisted pair 4

EXC+

Sense+

IN+

R +

PIN1 EXC-

PIN6 Sense-

PIN8

PIN3

PIN2 IN- PIN7

PIN5 GND(isolated) PIN4

If TEDS is used also the shield could be used as GNDisolated

For quarter bridge mode:

Twisted pair 1

Twisted pair 2

IN+

R +

PIN2 Sense1

PIN5 EXC-

PIN3

PIN8

DAQP-STG Operation Notes

Free variable gain and excitation

The gain, excitation and offset values of this module are free programmable. So it is possible to normalize any physical sensor input signal to the ±5V output of the module. By using these settings as power on default, standalone solutions could be easily realized.

Gain: from 0.5 to 10000. The module input ranges are based on predefined gain values. The module automatically chose the best gain combination of the internal amplifiers to keep the overall noise and drift as low as possible.

Output offset: Could be programmed from the positive to the negative full scale range except on the input ranges above 1V.

Due to internal structure here the offset could be set from +20 % to – 20 %.

Excitation Voltage: The excitation voltage is programmable from 0 to 12 V in 185 μV steps. Setting the excitation to 0 V for example allows you to determine the noise of the sensor cabling. The sense terminals have to be connected to the excitation terminals all the time. Even if the remote sensing is not required.

Excitation current: The current could be programmed from 0.1 mA to 20 mA in 0.3 μA steps. The maximum compliance voltage is 12 V. The compliance voltage is automatically balanced around the internal GND. This minimizes the common mode error.

Power On Default function

You can store the latest settings of the module in the internal EE-Prom memory. Once the module restarts, it comes up automatically with these setting. This is important for stand alone applications and for fail-safe reasons.

Filter

The Module has nine selectable low-pass filters from 10 Hz to 100 kHz. The filter characteristic can be set to Butterworth

2nd order or Bessel 2nd order. An additional fixed filter inside this module is a 3rd order Bessel filter with a guaranteed -3 dB bandwidth of 300 kHz.

DAQP-STG Amplifier balance

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-25

The amplifier balance allows eliminating automatically all internal amplifier offsets. It switches the differential amplifier inputs

IN+ and IN- to the internal isolated GND reference point. Then the output offset of the module is automatically adjusted to zero for all ranges. This function takes up to 8 seconds. Automatically previous stored sensor offset values are cleared.

Sensor Balance

Typically every strain gage sensor has a certain offset. That comes from manufacturing tolerances or because of sensor mounting. By performing a bridge balance this sensor offset could be completely removed on the analog side up to 200 % of the actual range. This allows using the full dynamic of the AD-board instead of losing resolution because of digital offset shifting. Output offset and sensor balance may not exceed 200 % of range (20 % for ranges above 1 V).

Internal Completion Resistors

The DAQP-STG has an internal half bridge completion and two internal quarter bridge completions for 120 Ohm and 350 Ohm strain gages. The used high precision resistors with low temperature drift allow a long- time stable measurement of almost every strain gage type without using an external completion network.

Internal Shunt

With two internal shunt resistors (59.88 kOhm and 175 kOhm) and one spare socket for a customised shunt, the DAQP-STG has wide flexibility in case of shunt calibration. A jumper network gives the possibility to connect the internal shunts to either

Sense+ Sense – IN+ or IN- to be compatible to existing sensor types and correction calculation methods. This technology is used to correct the complete measurement chain gain error from the sensor input to the digital signal output. It is based on the known ratio between the shunt resistor and the strain gage resistance.

Short

It switches the differential amplifier inputs IN+ and IN- from the input terminals to the internal isolated GND reference point.

With this function the absolute sensor offset could be determined.

CAL

It applies a high precision internal reference signal with 80% of the full scale value to the module. For ranges above 1V the reference signal level is 20 % of range.

Self Test

The self test function is a software controlled procedure that checks in the first step the amplifier itself. In the second step a basic sensor check will be performed. This test is only available in DeweSoft if an AD-Card is installed.

Part 1: Amplifier Test

The amplifier offset is checked by using the Short function The 80% Cal signal is applied to the amplifier. The complete isolation amplifier including the AD-Card is checked by using this test signal. The self test circuit switches the amplifier input to the positive excitation voltage, so also the input amplifier is checked. Warning: if there is a short circuit on the excitation this test will fail.

Part 2: Basic Sensor Test

Bridge Sensor: It is checked if the supply current doesn’t exceed the maximum value, and if the excitation voltage is within the predefined value.

10-26 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.

6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Half bridge signal connection

5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors

5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used. A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the DAQP-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution. The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50 % of potentiometer position.

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-27

Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection

(Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)

⇒

-

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6 must be connected!

The 3-wire quarter bridge is only able to compensate symmetrical wire resistance

4-wire sensor connection

(Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)

In the quarter bridge 4-wire mode the DAQP-STG internally adjusts its excitation so that on the gage the resistor terminates exactly on the half of the excitation voltage. All wire resistances are compensated.

Resistance, RTD 2-wire and 4-wire

For resistance and RTD mode, 4-wire connection is recommended (2-wire connection will not compensate wire resistance).

10-28 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Other measurement modes and hook-ups

Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection

⇒

CAUTiON: if the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 v. This will internally connect the iN- to the GNDisolated to improve the common mode rejection.

Sensor with supply, and voltage output

In the quarter bridge 4-wire mode the DAQP-STG internally adjusts its excitation so that on the gage the resistor terminates exactly on the half of the excitation voltage. All wire resistances are compensated.

Why More Wires are Better...

Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with 6-wire technology this can be completely compensated!

Temperature drift:

2-wire

3-wire

4-wire

Intial error

Offset

25183 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

Sensitivity

-4.97 %

-2.6 %

0.0 %

Drift after 10°C warm up

Offset Sensitivity

956 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

-0.18 %

-0.01 %

0.00 %

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-29

10-30 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-BRIDGE-A Isolated Strain Gage Module

Protection:

Input sensitivity:

Ranges and filter:

Bridge offset:

Bridge completion:

Shunt calibration:

Custom range:

Signal connection:

Fully isolated (input and excitation)

0.5 mV/V to 1000 mV/V

Button or software selection

Automatic bridge offset adjustment (approx. ±200 % of range)

Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge (120 and 350 Ohm)

Two internal shunts or external shunt calibration possible

Programmable range for sensitivity, excitation and offset

9-pin SUB-D or 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)

DAQP-BRiDGE-A specifications

Parameter

Gain:

DAQP-BRIDGE-A

20 to 1000

Input ranges: @ 5 VDC excitation:

Range selection:

Input impedance:

DC accuracy:

Gain linearity:

±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250 mV ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20, ±50 mV/V

Push button or software

> 100 MOhm

±0.1 %

±0.05 %

Excitation voltage: Accuracy: Drift: Protection: 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5 and 10 VDC software programmable (5 VDC = default setting) 0.05 % ±1 mV typ. 20 ppm (max. 40 ppm) Continuous short to ground

Bridge types: Full bridge 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable) 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ohm (software programmable)

Bridge resistance:

Shunt calibration:

Zero adjust:

120 Ohm to 10 kOhm (down to 87 Ohm on request)

Two internal shunt resistors or external resistor for shunt calibration (175k & 59k88)

Full automatic, ±200 % of F.S. (via push button or software)

Bandwidth (-3dB):

Filters (lowpass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth:

Typical CMRR:

Overvoltage protection:

Isolation:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

RS-485 interface:

20 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Push button or software

Bessel or Butterworth (software programmable) 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

71 dB @ Gain 1000 79 dB @ Gain 20

73 dB @ 0 Hz 71 dB @ 400 Hz 70 dB @ 1 kHz

±10 VDC

350 VDC (for input and excitation)

±5 V

< 10 Ohm

Max. 5 mA

Continuous short to ground

Yes

Parameter

TEDS support:

MSI support:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Module Pin-outs

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-31

DAQP-BRIDGE-A

No

Manually support of MSI-BR-TH-x adapter

±9 VDC (±1 %)

Typ. 1.44 W @ 350 Ohm, 1.83 W @ 120 Ohm (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation) Max: 3 W (depending on sensor) *

⇒

CAUTiON: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire sensor connection 4-wire sensor connection

⇒

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!

10-32 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Half bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection

⇒

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!

Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection

⇒

⇒

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!

1) ‘Shunt’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

Potentiometric and µv measurements

The differential amplifier of the DAQP-BRIDGE-B module is designed to measure small voltages (with very low offset drift and high amplification). These are exactly the same requirements than for μV amplifiers.

By setting the bridge input type to Voltage you can select input ranges from ±0.5 mV to ±500 mV. The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for μV measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth, a lot of input and filter ranges and a programmable offset (Auto Zero).

The correct hook-up is simply connecting your µV signal to the IN+ and IN- pins of the this module, and be sure to use a shielded cable and connect the drain to the ground pin of the DSUB connector on the DAQ module.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-33

A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers.

The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for potentiometric measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth and a programmable offset (by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution).

Module configuration

DAQP-BRIDGE-A: Excitation: 0.5 V

Range: 500 mV/V

The following table shows how the mV/V ranges are calculated. The ranges depend on the gain and the excitation voltage (note that commas indicate decimal points in this table):

⇒

Always change the excitation voltage before changing the input range, otherwise you will not get the required 500 mv/v range.

Potentiometer sensor connection

The left side shows the connections on the signal conditioner, while the right side represents your potentiometric sensor:

10-34 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-BRIDGE-B Strain Gage Module

Input sensitivity:

Bandwidth, filter:

Bridge offset:

Bridge completion:

Shunt calibration:

Custom range:

TEDS:

Signal connection:

0.05 mV/V to 1000 mV/V

200 kHz, 9 selectable lowpass filters (10 Hz to 100 kHz)

Automatic offset adjustment (approx. ±200 % of range)

Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge (120 and 350 Ohm)

Supports 3- and 4-wire 1⁄4 bridge connection

Two internal shunts or external shunt calibration possible

Programmable range for sensitivity, excitation and offset

Support for TEDS sensors

9-pin SUB-D or 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)

DAQP-BRiDGE-B specifications

Parameter

Gain:

Input ranges: @ 5 VDC excitation:

Range selection:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Accuracy @ 5 VDC excitation:

Gain drift @ 5 VDC excitation:

Excitation voltage: Accuracy: Drift:

Protection:

Bridge types:

Bridge resistance:

Shunt calibration:

Zero adjust:

Bandwidth (-3dB):

Filters (lowpass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

Typ. SNR @ 100 kHz [1 kHz] and 5 VDC excitation:

Typ. CMRR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and 5 VDC excitation:

Max. common mode voltage:

Overvoltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

DAQP-BRIDGE-B (revision 2)

10 to 10 000

±0.5 1), ±1, ±2.5, ±5, ±10, ±25, ±50, ±100, ±250, ±500 mV ±0.1 1), ±0.2, ±0.5, ±1, ±2, ±5, ±10, ±20,

±50, ±100 mV/V

Push button or software

> 100 MOhm

3.5 nV * √Hz

±0.05 % F.S.

10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K

0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5 and 10 VDC software programmable (5 VDC = default setting) ±0.05 % ±0.7 mV ±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K Continuous short to ground

4- or 6-wire full bridge 3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software programmable) 3- or

4-wire 1⁄4 bridge with internal resistor for 120 and 350 Ohm (software programmable) 1)

87 Ohm to 10 kOhm @ ≤ 5 VDC excitation (120 Ohm to 10 kOhm @ 10 VDC excitation)

Two internal shunt resistors

Full automatic, ±200 % of F.S. (via push button or software)

200 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0) 1)

10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Push button or software

Bessel or Butterworth (software programmable) 40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

66 dB [84 dB] @ 1 mV/V 82 dB [100 dB] @ 50 mV/V

125 dB [120 dB] @ DC 115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz 110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

±6 V

±10 VDC

±5 V

< 10 Ohm

Max. 5 mA

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-35

Parameter

Output protection:

RS-485 interface:

TEDS: Supported TEDS chips

MSI support:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

DAQP-BRIDGE-B (revision 2)

Continuous short to ground

Yes

Hardware support for TEDS (Transducer Electronic Data Sheet) DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433

Automatic MSI-BR-TH-x support

±9 VDC (±1 %)

Typ. 1 W @ 350 Ohm, 1.3 W @ 120 Ohm (both full bridge @ 5 VDC excitation) Max: 2 W (depending on sensor)

1) 4-wire 1⁄4 bridge or ±0.5 mV input range will limit the bandwidth to 30 kHz

Module Pin-outs

⇒

CAUTiON: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire sensor connection 4-wire sensor connection

⇒

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!

10-36 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Half bridge signal connection

5-wire sensor connection

(sense wired at the sensor)

3-wire sensor connection

(sense wired at the connector)

⇒

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!

Quarter bridge signal connection

4-wire sensor connection

(sense wired at the sensor)

3-wire sensor connection

(sense wired at the connector)

⇒

⇒

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6; LEMO: pin 5 and 6) MUST be connected!

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

Potentiometric and µv measurements

The differential amplifier of the DAQP-BRIDGE-B module is designed to measure small voltages (with very low offset drift and high amplification). These are exactly the same requirements than for μV amplifiers.

By setting the bridge input type to Voltage you can select input ranges from ±0.5 mV to ±500 mV. The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for μV measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth, a lot of input and filter ranges and a programmable offset (Auto Zero).

The correct hook-up is simply connecting your µV signal to the IN+ and IN- pins of the this module, and be sure to use a shielded cable and connect the drain to the ground pin of the DSUB connector on the DAQ module.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-37

A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers.

The advantages of using bridge amplifiers for potentiometric measurements: only one multifunctional module with high bandwidth and a programmable offset (by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution).

Module configuration

DAQP-BRIDGE-B: Excitation: 1 V

Range: 500 mV/V

The following table shows how the mV/V ranges are calculated. The ranges depend on the gain and the excitation voltage (note that commas indicate decimal points in this table):

⇒

Always change the excitation voltage before changing the input range, otherwise you will not get the required 500 mv/v range.

Potentiometer sensor connection

The left side shows the connections on the signal conditioner, while the right side represents your potiometric sensor:

10-38 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-CFB Carrier Frequency/LVDT module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors:

Special features:

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection: full bridge; half bridge; quarter bridge 120 Ω; quarter bridge 350 Ω inductive full bridge; inductive half bridge (such as most LVTD Sensors)

Automatic balancing up to 400% of range

Internal completion for 1⁄2 and 1⁄4 bridge

Two internal shunts for completion

0.1 mV/V to 1000 mV/V

2.3 kHz

N/A

9-pin SUB-D

DAQP-CFB specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Inductive input ranges:

Input voltage ranges:

Bridge resistance:

Excitation voltage level:

Excitation voltage frequency:

Maximum excitation current:

Excitation voltage synchronization:

Excitation voltage accuracy:

Excitation voltage drift:

Excitation frequency drift:

Nonlinearity:

Accuracy:

Offset drift:

Gain drift:

Balance adjusting range:

Capacitive imbalance compensation:

Phase adjustment range:

Balance adjusment accuracy:

Supported sensors:

Shunt calibration:

Completion and shunt resistor accuracy:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

DAQP-CFB

0.1 mV/V to 1000 mV/V

5 mV/V to 1000 mV/V (inductive range is limited from 20 mVRMS to 1000 mVRMS input voltage)

0.2 mVRMS to 1000 mVRMS

60 - 1,000 Ohm depending on excitation voltage

1, 2, 5 VRMS

5 kHz sine wave ±20 Hz

30 mARMS short circuit protected

Internal or external

5 VRMS ±5 mVRMS; 2 VRMS ±2.5 mVRMS; 1 VRMS ±2.5 mVRMS typically 50 ppm/°K typically 20 ppm/°K

±0.02 % FS

±0.2 % of reading ±0.1 % of range

±0.003 μV/V/K ±40 ppm of Range/°K within ±30 ppm/°K

±400 % of Range (±200 % at 1 V excitation)

Approx. 1000 pF

±40° (inductive mode only) within ±0.1 % FS full bridge; half bridge; quarter bridge 120 Ω; quarter bridge 350 Ω inductive full bridge; inductive half bridge (typically LVTD Sensors) internal 50 kOhm and 100 kOhm Shunt

±0.05 %

DC - 2.3 kHz

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-39

Parameter

Filters (lowpass):

Filter characteristics:

Typ. SNR @ 1000 Hz [100 Hz] and 2 VRMS excitation:

Over voltage protection

Output voltage:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power consumption:

Supported TEDS chips:

Weight:

1) TEDS only supported by revision 2 of this module (or higher)

DAQP-CFB

10, 30, 100, 300, 1 kHz

2nd order Bessel, 2nd order Butterworth (40 dB/ decade)

78 dB [85 dB] @ 1 mV/V

80 dB [87 dB] @ 100 mV/V

±10 V

±5V

±5 mA

Continuous short to ground max. 1.5 W

DS2406, DS2430, DS2432, DS2433, DS2431 1) within 250 (±30) g

Module Pin-outs

-

Pins 6 and 8 can be left unconnected

Software controlled functions

Amplifier balance

Amplifier balance allows elimination of the amplifier offset. The input is shorted and all ranges are balanced by within the module. Any previously stored sensor offset values are cleared.

Sensor balance

Sensor balance is similar to the amplifier balance. Because the input is not shorted, the sensor offset is automatically adjusted to zero.

Short

When measuring the absolute strain it is possible to disconnect the sensor via software and short the input.

10-40 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Shunt

Two different internal shunts resistors (50 kΩ and 100 kΩ) can be connected for easy function or calibration check. With this technique the whole measurement chain (sensor, amplifier and analog to digital conversation) are checked. The table below shows the shunt calibration result for typical strain gage resistor values.

Strain gage resistor

120Ω

120Ω

350Ω

350Ω

Shunt resistor

50k

100k

50k

100k

Result

0.6 mV/V

0.3 mV/V

1.74 mV/V

0.87 mV/V

The shunt resistor check is not possible in inductive bridge operation mode.

Cal

Independent of the value of the input signal, the CAL function sets the output to 80% of the actual range. The base of this calibration signal is the excitation voltage. Therefore this is an easy check of the excitation voltage.

The typical reasons why the excitation is not working are short curcuit of the excitation at the cabling or sensor defects, too high a load for the excitation amplifier (please decrease the excitation level), or wrong settings of the synchronization mode (no master assigned).

Synchronizing multiple amplifiers

Due the high amplification of strain gage amplifiers it is needed to synchronize the excitation voltage if multiple channels are used. This is done with Pin 8 of the back plane connector. See the detailed DAQ modules manual for details about how to set up the synchronization of multiple DAQP-CFB modules.

Sensor connections

Inductive half bridge sensors LVDT sensors

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-41

Full bridge signal connection

4-wire sensor connection for standard bridge & inductive bridge

(Sense wired at the connector)

-

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6) could be connected to be compatible to other modules.

Half bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection for standard bridge

(Sense wired at the sensor)

Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection for standard bridge

(Sense wired at the connector)

-

-

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6) could be connected to be compatible to other DEWE-BRIDGE amplifier.

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

10-42 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors:

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Constant current type accelerometers, aka

IEPE, ICP, I.C.P.®, or Piezotronic

±5 V, ±1.66 V, ±500 mV, ±166 mV, ±50 mV

300 kHz

N/A

BNC connector

DAQP-ACC-A specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Gain:

Range/gain selection:

Gain error:

Sensor types:

Sensor excitation:

Input impedance:

Input voltage range:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters (high-pass)

Filters (low-pass):

Voltage < 4 V

Voltage > 19 V

0.5 Hz filter

5 Hz filter

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics up to 100 kHz

300 kHz

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power supply voltage:

RS-485 interface for module control:

Gain 1 and 3

Gain 10

Gain 30

Gain 100

DAQP-ACC-A

±5 V, ±1.66 V, ±500 mV, ±166 mV, ±50 mV

1, 3, 10, 30, 100

Pushbutton or software selection

0.5 %

IEPE (constant current) only

4 or 8 mA (software selection), 10 %, up to 28 VDC

5 or 7 MOhm (depending on time constant), in parallel with 1.2 nF

4 to 19 V

”Shortcut” detection

“No sensor” detection

From selected highpass filter to 300 kHz (+2 to -5 dB @ fg)

0.5 Hz and 5 Hz (software selection)

0.32 s time constant

0.032 s time constant

1 kHz, 10 kHz, 100 kHz, 300 kHz other filter steps available as an option upon request

Pushbutton or software selection

Butterworth

100 dB / decade (30 dB / octave)

80 dB / decade (24 dB / octave)

94 dB

91 dB

80 dB

73 dB

±5 V

<10 Ω

5 mA maximum

Continuous short to ground

±9 VDC (±10 %)

Yes

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-43

Parameter

TEDS support:

Power consumption:

DAQP-ACC-A

N/A

Typical 0.8 to 1.0 W (depending on sensor)

Sensor connection

Standard IEPE accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the Dewetron module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with BNC, 10-32, etc.

10-44 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-CHARGE-A Charge/IEPE module

Handles both of these sensors:

Special features:

IEPE sensitivity:

Charge sensitivity:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Charge type accelerometers and microphones, plus

IEPE (Piezotron) accelerometers and mics

Directly outputs acceleration, velocity or displacement

0, 20, 40 and 60 dB (±5 V, ±500 mV, ±50 mV, ±5 mV)

5, 50, 500, 5000 and 50000 pC

0.1 Hz to 50 kHz

N/A

BNC (10-32 microdot adapter included)

DAQP-CHARGE-A specifications

Parameter

Input sensitivity:

IEPE mode:

CHARGE mode:

Supported sensor types:

Sensor type selection:

Gain accuracy:

Input range fine tuning:

Range selection:

Output voltage:

Output noise:

Power consumption:

DAQP-CHARGE-A

0, 20, 40, 60 dB (±5 V, ±500 mV, ±50 mV, ±5 mV)

5, 50, 500, 5000, 50000 pC

Dynamic CHARGE and IEPE (constant current)

Pushbutton or software selection

1% full scale

Software selectable

Pushbutton: fixed ranges

Software: every range

Single (velocity) or double (displacement), 0 dB at 15.9 H Integration on-board:

LED indicators:

Constant current source:

Filters (high-pass):

Filters (low-pass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth

Range and filter:

ICP LED:

OVL LED:

A, V and D LED:

5 LEDs

Active with connected ICP® sensor, inactive for charge input

Overload control (output voltage > 5 V)

Indicator for acceleration, velocity and displacement output

3.2 to 5.6 mA, > 24 V

0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10 Hz (±2 dB @ f0)

100 Hz, 1, 3, 10, 50 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)

Push button or software selection

Butterworth

80 dB / decade (24 dB / octave)

0.1 Hz to 50 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)

5000 pC

500 pC

50 PC

5 pC

5 pC

90 dB

87 dB

73 dB

54 dB

60 dB @ 10 kHz

±5V

< 8 mV (all ranges with 50 kHz filter)

0.6 W to 1.2 W (depending on sensor)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-45

Parameter

Power supply voltage:

TEDS support:

RS-485 interface for module control

DAQP-CHARGE-A

±9 VDC (±10 %)

N/A

Yes

Sensor connection

Standard charge or IEPE accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the

Dewetron module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with BNC, 10-32, etc.

BNC to Microdot adapter

This adapter is included for no additional cost with the DAQP-CHARGE-A module.

-

-

Using an iEPE® sensor with charge input selected (or a Charge sensor with iEPE® input selected) will not destroy the module or the sensor, but the measured values will be incorrect.

When using the fine tuning option of the input range (3686 steps per decade), the module is no longer in a calibrated state. in this case the input range LED’s are not active!

10-46 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-CHARGE-B Isolated Static/Dynamic Charge module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors:

Special capability:

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Charge sensors, dynamic or static

Selectable time bases for long settling time sensors

Charge drift < 0.03 pC/sec

±100 to ±1 000 000 pC

100 kHz

350 VDC

BNC connector

DAQP-CHARGE-B specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Supported sensor types:

Gain accuracy:

Gain linearity:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Range selection:

Filters (low-pass):

Filter selection:

Filter characteristics:

DAQP-CHARGE-B

±100, ±500, ±2 000, ±10 000, ±40 000, ±200 000, ±1 000 000 pC

Dynamic and static CHARGE accelerometers and microphones

0.5 % of range (1 % of range for 100 and 500 pC)

±0.5 %

100 kHz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

Pushbutton or software selection

10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 3 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz (±2 dB @ f0)

Push button or software selection

Bessel or Butterworth (software selectable)

40 dB / decade (12 dB / octave)

Time constant:

Long

Highpass filter on

Drift input current @ 25 °C:

Offset drift:

Amplifier reset:

Offset after reset:

Typ. SNR @ max. bandwidth:

Range 100 pC

Range > 2000 pC

Ouput noise:

@ 100 kHz

@ 30 kHz

Output voltage:

Output noise:

Cable noise:

CMR:

Input overvoltage protection:

Isolation:

DC mode

2 to 1000 sec.

< ±0.03 pC/s

50 ppm of Range/°K

Push button or software

±2 mV or ±1 pC (greater value is valid)

76 dB (82 dB @ 30 kHz / 85 dB @ 10 kHz )

81 dB (89 dB @ 30 kHz / 93 dB @ 10 kHz )

0.3 mVRMS + 0.01 pCRMS

0.12 mVRMS + 0.008 pCRMS

±5V

< 8 mV (all ranges with 50 kHz filter)

< 10-5 pCRMS/pF

< 0.02 pC/V (difference between input and output ground)

1 kV ESD

350 VDC

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-47

Parameter

Power consumption:

Power supply voltage:

TEDS support:

RS-485 interface for module control

DAQP-CHARGE-B

1.5 W to 3.5 W (depending on signal range and frequency)

±9 VDC (±1 %)

N/A

Yes

Sensor connection

Standard charge accelerometer or microphone connector and cable. Use a standard BNC plug on the Dewetron module side. The sensor side may be molded into the sensor, or a modular connector with BNC, 10-32, etc.

BNC to Microdot adapter

This adapter is available as an option with the DAQP-CHARGE-B module.

High pass filter

The time constant of the internal highpass filter depends on the used input range. For range 1 (100 pC, 500 pC and 2,000 pC) the time constant is 2 seconds (or 0.07 Hz), for range 2 (10,000 pC and 40,000 pC) the time constant is 40 seconds (or 3.9 mHz). For the highest both ranges (200,000 pC and 1,000,000 pC) the time constant is 1,000 seconds or 0.16 mHz).

10-48 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-THERM Isolated Thermocouple module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors:

Special feature:

Cold junction compensation:

Linearization:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Thermocouple types K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U

Freely programmable measuring range!

On-board and automatic

On-board and automatic

3 kHz

350 VDC

Standard mini T/C connector, universal white

DAQP-THERM specifications

Parameter

Thermocouple types:

Range selection:

CJC absolute accuracy:

CJC stability:

Linearization:

Accuracy:

Nonlinearity:

Input resistance:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters:

Filter characteristics:

Isolation:

Typ. CMRR @ 3kHz:

Open thermocouple detection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output protection:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

TEDS support:

Connector:

DAQP-THERM

K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U

Min. to max. of the input range is freely programmable within the full thermocouple input span

±0.2 °C

0.01 °C/°C ambient temperature change

DSP based linearization

Typical 0.3° for type K including CJC error; details see table below

> 0.01°C

> 1 MΩ

3 kHz

3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz

Butterworth or Bessel, 2nd, 4th, 8th order programmable

±1000 VRMS continuous (for input excitation and TEDS interface)

> 160 dB

100 MΩ pull up; software selectable

±5 V; 0 to 5 V; (±10 V and 0 to 10 V possible only with special DEWE-30)

100 Ω

Continuous short to ground

±9 VDC (±1 %)

1 W typical

N/A

Universal mini termocouple connector, white color code

Standard MiNi thermocouple connector

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-49

S

N

E

J

K

T

R

L

C

U

DAQP-THERM input ranges and detailed specifications

Thermocouple

Type Standard

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN 43710

ASTM E988-96

DIN 43710

-210

-270

-50

-50

-270

-270

0

0

-200

Input range min

[°C] max

[°C]

-270 1372

1200

400

1760

1760

1300

1000

900

2310

600

-270 to -200

°C [°C]

6.70

0.68

4.37

9.14

4.25

-200 to -100

°C [°C]

0.70

0.60

0.69

0.77

0.60

0.64

B DIN EN 60584-1 0 1820

Accuracy

-100 to 0 °C

[°C]

0 to 100 °C

[°C]

0.35

0.26

0.32

0.37

0.85

0.77

0.37

0.33

0.37

0.25

0.26

0.59

0.58

0.28

0.24

0.25

0.36

0.26

0 to 500°C

0.26

All values given in Celcius on these pages.

100 °C to fullscale [% of reading + °C]

0.027

0.26

0.019

0.009

0.012

0.017

0.018

0.045

0.25

0.23

0.44

0.45

0.27

0.23

0.33

0.33

0.24

> 500°C

0.44

Software programmable module range

Regardless which input mode is selected, the module measurement range is completely free programmable. Simply by entering the lower and upper limit the amplifier adjusts its gain and offset factors automatically. The amplifier output is scaled to either ±5 V or 0 to 5 V. Converting a nonlinear temperature signal from a thermocouple to a linear analog output is one of the key features of this amplifier.

Open thermocouple detection

The open thermocouple detection of the DAQP-THERM consists of an 100 MΩ pull-up resistor. That typically drives a 50 nA current through the sensor which normally does not take effect on the measurement, but is enough to generate an input overflow if the sensor breaks. Despite of this small current, there are sensors available where this current generates a big error. These sensors are typically non-contact infrared thermocouples and fast response thermocouples. In that case the open thermocouple detection can simply be deactivated in the software.

Sensors with up to 50 kΩ output impedance can be measured in this way.

CJC

The DAQP-THERM comes with an integrated cold junction compensation sensor with an absolute accuracy of

±0.2 °C. In order to archieve this accuracy the sensor has to be connected for at least 5 minutes to the thermocouple connector (CJC equilibrium time).

10-50 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-MULTI Isolated Multifunction module

Thermocouple:

Bridge:

Voltage input:

RTD:

Resistance:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Freely programmable ranges within full thermocouple input span

±0.5 to ±1000 mV/mA

±5 mV to ±5 V (free programmable within ±5 V)

Resistance Temperature Detector (Pt100 to Pt2000), freely programmable ranges within full RTD input span

1 Ω to 1 MΩ (free programmable between 1 Ω and 1 MΩ)

3 kHz

1000 VRMS continuous

Signal connection: Standard miniature thermocouple connector, and

9-pin SUB-D connector

DAQP-MULTi specifications

Parameter

Input types:

Thermocouples

Sensor types:

Range:

CJC absolute accuracy:

CJC stability:

Accuracy:

Linearization:

Non-linearity:

Open thermocouple detection:

Connector:

RTD

Sensor types:

Range:

Constant current:

Accuracy:

Linearization:

Non-linearity:

Voltage

Input ranges:

Accuracy:

Offset drift:

Gain drift:

Input impedance:

V

DAQP-MULTI

Thermocouple (TC); Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD); Voltage; Resistance; Bridge with constant current excitation

K, J, T, R, S, N, E, B, L, C, U, others on request

Min. to max. of the input range is free programmable within the full thermocouple input span

±0.2 °C

0.01 °C/°C ambient temperature change

Typical 0.3° for type K including CJC error; details see table below.

DSP based linearization on-board

> 0.01°C

100 MΩ pull up; software selectable

Mini thermocouple connector with integrated cold junction compensation sensor

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Pt2000, others on request

Min. and max. of the input range is free programmable within the full RTD input span

Pt100: 1 mA; Pt200, Pt500: 0.5 mA; Pt1000, Pt2000: 0.2 mA

Typical accuracy 0.15 °C for Pt100, details see table below

DSP based linearization on-board

> 0.01 °C

±5 mV, ±10 mV, ±20 mV, ±50 mV, ±100 mV, ±200 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2 V, ±5 V, free programmable within ±5V

0 to ±100 mV Range: 0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±5 μV

>±100mV to ±5V Range: 0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±100 μV

Typical ±0.3 μV/°K ±10 ppm of range/°K

Typical 15 ppm/°K

> 100 MΩ (power off: 50 kΩ)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-51

Parameter

Input noise:

Resistance

Ranges:

Accuracy:

Drift:

Constant current:

Bridge

Ranges:

Accuracy:

Offset drift:

Gain drift:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Automatic bridge balance:

Supported sensors:

Connector:

Excitation current:

Accuracy:

0 to 200 μA

200 μA to 5 mA

Drift:

Compliance voltage:

Source resistance:

General Specifications

-3dB Bandwidth:

Filters:

Group delay:

Filter characteristics:

Typ. CMRR @ 3kHz

Isolation:

Over-voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

RS485 interface for module control:

DAQP-MULTI

8 nV * √Hz

1, 3, 10, 30, 100, 300, 1k, 3k, 10k, 30k, 100k, 1M, free programmable between 1 Ω and 1 MΩ

See table below

Typical 15 ppm/°K

From 5 μA to 5 mA depending on range

0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 500, 1000 mV/mA

0.02 % of reading ±0.01 % of Range ±5 μV typical ±0.3 μV/°K ±10 ppm of range/°K typical 15ppm/°K

> 100 MΩ (power off: 50 kΩ)

8 nV * √Hz

±200 % of range

4 wire full bridges

DSUB 9, standard Dewetron bridge pin-outs

1, 2, 4 mA; software programmable

0.02 % ±50 nA

0.02 % ±1 μA

15 ppm/°K

15 V

> 150 kΩ

3 kHz

3 Hz, 10 Hz, 30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz

300 μs with highest filter

Butterworth or Bessel, 2nd, 4th, 8th order programmable

>160 dB

±1000 VRMS continuous (for input excitation and TEDS interface)

±100 V between inputs (clamping voltage: 5 V @ TC input; 11 V @ Voltage input)

±5 V; 0 to 5V; (±10 V and 0 to 10 V with special DEWE-30)

22 Ω

Max. 5 mA

Continuous short to ground

Yes

10-52 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Parameter

Supported TEDS chips:

MSI support:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

DAQP-MULTI

DS2406, DS2430A, DS2431, DS2432, DS2433,DS28EC20

No

±9 VDC (±1 %)

1 W typical

N

E

L

C

U

T

R

S

J

K

DAQP-MULTi input ranges and detailed specifications for THERMOCOUPLES

Thermocouple

Type Standard

B

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN EN 60584-1

DIN 43710

ASTM E988-96

DIN 43710

DIN EN 60584-1

Input range min

[°C] max

[°C]

-270 1372

-210

-270

-50

-50

-270

-270

0

0

-200

1200

400

1760

1760

1300

1000

900

2310

600

Accuracy

-270 to -200

°C [°C]

6.70

0.68

4.37

9.14

4.25

0 1820

-200 to -100

°C [°C]

0.70

0.60

0.69

0.77

0.60

-100 to 0 °C

[°C]

0.35

0.32

0.37

0.85

0.77

0.37

0.33

0.64

0.37

0 to 100 °C

[°C]

0.26

0.25

0.26

0.59

0.58

0.28

0.24

0.25

0.36

0.26

0 to 500°C

0.26

100 °C to fullscale [% of reading + °C]

0.027

0.26

0.019

0.009

0.012

0.017

0.018

0.045

0.25

0.23

0.44

0.45

0.27

0.23

0.33

0.33

0.24

> 500°C

0.44

DAQP-MULTi input ranges and detailed specifications for RTDs

RTDs

Type

Pt100 (385)

Pt200 (385)

Pt500 (385)

Pt1000 (385)

Pt2000 (385)

Pt100 (3926)

Standard

DIN EN 60751

DIN EN 60751

DIN EN 60751

DIN EN 60751

DIN EN 60751

Input range min

[°C] max

[°C]

-200 850

-200

-200

-200

-200

-200

850

850

850

850

850

Current

[mA]

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.1

0.2

Accuracy

-200 to -100 °C

[°C]

0.14

0.18

0.34

0.22

0.25

0.14

-100 to 0 °C

[°C]

0.21

0.27

0.42

0.29

0.35

0.21

100 °C to full-scale [% of reading + °C]

0.07

0.21

0.10

0.09

0.09

0.12

0.07

0.27

0.42

0.29

0.36

0.21

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-53

DAQP-MULTi input ranges and detailed DAQP-MULTi detailed specifications specifications for RESiSTANCE for EXCiTATiON CURRENT

Excitation

Resistance

Range

[Ω]

1,000,000

300,000

100,000

30,000

10,000

3

1

3,000

1,000

300

100

30

10

Current

[mA]

0.005

1

2

4

5

5

0.2

0.5

1

0.015

0.05

0.1

0.1

Accuracy

% of reading

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

0.04

% of range

1.02

0.07

0.25

0.18

0.12

0.08

0.06

0.10

0.23

0.35

0.11

0.07

0.08

0 to 200 μA

>0.2 to 5 mA

% of reading

0.02

0.02

[µA]

0.05

1

Sensor connections

9-pin DSUB connector Mini thermocouple connector

10-54 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Resistance, RTD 2-wire and 4-wire

-

For resistance and RDT mode the 4-wire connection is recommended. The 2-wire connection will not compensate the wire resistance.

Voltage Measurement

Bridge sensor

Thermocouple sensor

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-55

10-56 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQP-FREQ-A Frequency to Voltage module

Ideal for these kinds of sensors:

Frequency ranges:

Special feature:

Input ranges:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Frequency and tachometer sensors, hall effect F/V, optical speed sensors, and more

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz

Second output from module: TTL clock mirror of input frequency

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz

350 VDC

9-pin SUB-D connector

DAQP-FREQ-A specifications

Parameter

Input ranges:

Minimum input frequency:

Range selection:

Accuracy:

Input signal:

Input resistance:

Input filters:

Filter selection:

Input coupling:

Trigger level:

Sensor supply:

Input isolation:

Over-voltage protection:

Output filter:

Filter characteristics

Selection

DAQP-FREQ-A

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz

2 % of selected range

Pushbutton or software selection

±0.05 % (from 4 % to 100 % of range)

10 mV to 300 V

Note: the DSUB connector is only specified up to 250 V

For signals above 60 V do not use the metal housing of the provided DSUB connector

1 MΩ

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 5 kHz, 20 kHz, 100 kHz, 200 kHz

Pushbutton or software selection

DC or AC (software selectable)

10 mV to 130 V (software programmable)

+12 VDC, ±9 VDC (not isolated)

350 VDC

±500 V peak / 350 VRMS

3 ranges with 1.5, 30 and 500 ms (10 - 90 %)

Butterworth, 60 dB / decade (18 dB / octave)

Automatically according to input range

Slow (default) or fast output filter selectable within the input range

Output signals:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

Power consumption:

TEDS support:

Power supply voltage:

Main output

Secondary output

±5 V according to input frequency

Secondary: TTL level trigger output signal

< 10 mΩ

5 mA max.

Continuous short to ground

1 W max.

N/A

±9 VDC (±5 %)

Sensor connection

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-57

⇒

⇒

Sensor supply voltages are not isolated - only the input (pin 2 and 7)!

For signals above 60 v don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector!

Sensors without power supply Sensors with power supply

Open collector sensors (NPN) Open collector sensors (PNP)

-

The value of the resistor depends on the sensor supply voltage and the open collector sensor.

10-58 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

DAQN-V-OUT Isolated Voltage Output module

Module purpose:

Input/Output range:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

1:1 (unity gain) isolation module, compatible with AD series cards which have analog outputs

±10 V

400 Hz

1500 VRMS

-B: Banana plugs

-BNC: BNC connector

-D: 9-pin SUB-D connector

OUT

DAQN-v-OUT specifications

Parameter

Input range:

Input range maximum:

DAQN-V-OUT

±10 V

±36 V maximum (damage will occur above ±36 V)

Input resistance:

Output voltage range:

Over range capability:

Output drive:

Output resistance:

Output current during fault, maximum:

Output protection, transient:

CMV, output to input, continuous:

Transient

CMRR (50 / 60 Hz)

Accuracy:

50 MΩ

±10 V

5 % @ 10 V output

50 mA max.

0.5 Ω

75 mA

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989

1500 VRMS max.

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1-1989

110 dB

±0.05 % span (0 to 5 mA load)

NMR (-3 dB @ 400 Hz):

Non-linearity:

Stability:

100 dB per decade above 400 Hz

0.02 % span

Offset

Span

±25 ppm/°C

±20 ppm/°C

Noise:

Output ripple, 1 kHz bandwidth 2 mVpp

-3 dB Bandwidth: 400 Hz

Power supply voltage: 9 VDC ±5 %

Over voltage protection

Power supply current:

Power supply sensitivity:

±10 V

350 mA full load, 135 mA no load

±12.5 ppm/%

Output signal connections

DAQN-V-OUT-B module

Voltage output via banana plug cables

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, DAQ | 10-59

DAQN-V-OUT-BNC module

Voltage output via BNC cable

DAQN-V-OUT-B module

Voltage output via DSUB 9-pin cable

Pin

7

8

5

6

9

3

4

1

2

9-pin DSUB connector

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

GND (not isolated)

+9 V (not isolated)

Not connected

OUT + (-10 to +10 V, isolated)

OUT - (-10 to +10 V, isolated)

-9V (not isolated)

⇒

⇒

Use pin 4, 5 and 9 only as sensor supply (not isolated)!

For signals above 60 v don’t use the metal housing of SUB-D connector!

10-60 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, PAD | 10-61

PAD Series Modules

PAD Series Common Information

Calibration information

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

„

„

„

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

This manual contains no calibration information. There is a separate calibration kit available for DAQ series modules manual calibration. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software and instructions that you need to add to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.

General PAD module specifications

Module dimensions: 20 x 65 x 105 mm (0.79 x 2.56 x 4.13 in.)

(W x H x D without front cover and connectors)

Frontcover:

Environmental:

20 x 87 x 2 mm (0.79 x 3.43 x 0.08 in.)

(W x H x D without connector)

Temp. range storage:

Temp. range operating:

-30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)

-5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F)

Rel. humidity (MIL202): 0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing

RFI susceptibility: ±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

10-62 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

PAD Module Connectors

Front Panel Connector

Rear Connector

Accessible to the user. The connector type and pin assignment varies from module to module. Detailed pin assignment of each module is shown in the appropriate module description.

Not user accessible. 9-pin male SUB-D, interface to the Dewetron System.

RS-232/485 interface

PAD modules can be configured via RS-485 interface, and they require this interface for all data transfers.

The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include an internal RS-232/485 converter and interface. This converter allows communication with all Dewetron signal conditioning modules.

To communicate with the modules, the RS-232 interface must be set to the following parameters: baud rate: data bits: parity: stop bits: handshake:

9600

8 no parity

1 not required

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, PAD | 10-63

PAD Modules Table

Module Chs Input type Ranges Bandwidth

(BW)

Filters (FILT)

Voltage measurement

PAD-V8-P

V

8

Voltage

Current

±100 mV to ±50 V

±20 mA

BW: 6 Hz

FILT: 1 / 4 / 8 values

Temperature and ohmic measurement

PAD-TH8-P + PAD-CB8-J/K/T

Voltage

8

Thermocouple

PAD-TH8-P + PAD-CB8-RTD

8

RTDs

Resistors

±15, ±50, ±100, ±150 mV

-150 mV to +1.5V

Types J, K, T with PAD-CB8 breakout box

BW: 6 Hz

FILT: 1 / 4 / 8 values

Pt100, Pt200, Pt500,

Pt1000, Pt2000, Ni120 up to 2 MΩ

BW: 6 Hz

FILT: 1 / 4 / 8 values

Analog and digital outputs

PAD-DO7

7 Digital output Relay outputs (dry contacts) --

Isolation (ISO)

Overvoltage protection (OP)

Special functions

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: 150 VDC

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: 15 VDC

ISO: 350 VDC

OP: 15 VDC

Separate 24-bit

ADC per channel

Separate 24-bit

ADC per channel

Separate 24-bit

ADC per channel

ISO: 300 VDC

Max load:

0.5 A @ 60 VAC,

1 A @ 24 VDC

PAD-AO1 Voltage output 0 to 10V

1 -ISO: 300 VDC

--

Current output 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA

OUT

Please see the following pages for details about each of the available PAD series modules and accessories.

10-64 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Adding PAD modules to your Dewtetron system:

PAD modules can be plugged directly into the DEWE-3210, because it has 8 slots for DAQ/PAD/HSI series plugin modules. But if you don’t want to give up one of these eight dynamic input slots, you can simply add a DEWE-

30 series chassis.

This method also allows the DEWE-3211 to utilze PAD series modules, since this model does not have any slots on its chassis. When only PAD modules are installed into it, the DEWE-30 series expansion box connects easily via either RS485 connected to the Dewetron chassis’ EPAD interface, or via RS232C using the Dewetron chassis’

COM port. DEWE-30 chassis are available with 4, 8, 16, 32, 48, or 64 slots.

-

Note: if you want to also use DAQ or HSi series modules in this expansion rack, then you must also have an analog cable connecting it to the DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211. in addition, there must be an A/D card inside the DEWE-321x chassis with the appropriate number of ADCs available.

Typical hook-ups

PAD modules can plug directly into the DEWE-3210 via any of its 8 slots, or...

PAD modules can plug into a DEWE-30 chassis (4 to 64 slots), and connect to a DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211 via

RS232 com

If you connect a DEWE-30 chassis (with only PAD modules in it) to your DEWE-3210 or DEWE-3211, you may connect it via EITHER RS232 (com port) or RS485 (EPAD).

Do not connect both interfaces at the same time.

If using RS232 com port, you must configure the port used for additional PAD modules in the DEWESoft hardware setup, analog tab.

Make sure the PAD modules are checked

When adding external PAD modules, enter the number of them under “Additional PAD modules”

If adding a DEWE-30 via RS232, select the appropriate com port here for the additional PAD modules.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, PAD | 10-65

Addressing PAD modules

Each PAD module must have a unique address (just like DAQ modules). The address is stored inside the PAD module in nonvolatile memory. Therefore, if you remove a PAD module from one system, where it was set to address 31, and plug it into a different Dewetron chassis, it will still report itself on the bus at address 31.

This can cause a conflict if you already have a module at this address. In addition, it will be confusing to you when you hook up your signals to what you believe is PAD module at address 16, but the channels show up on address 31. Therefore, it is vitally important that you set the addresses of any DAQ, PAD, or HSI modules that you plug into your Dewetron system.

-

There is no need to set the addresses of MDAQ modules, except when initially installed at the factory.

There are essentially two ways to address your modules:

„

FILL RACK PROCEDURE - this addresses all of your modules in sequence. This is what you should do if you have been changing more than one module around, to ensure that every module is at the appropriate and unique address.

„

FILL ONE MODULE PROCEDURE - easier and faster, when you simply want to exchange one module.

Let’s look at how to do each one of the above procedures:

Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure

Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. Now click on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN and you will see this menu:

Select the FILL RACK option, and the software will prompt you like this:

Follow the instruction to press the TOP black button on the module in the first slot, which is always SLOT 0 in the case of doing a FILL RACK, since you are starting at 0 and going all the way up, filling all modules.

When you press this button on the module, the system will beep and prompt you to press the next module’s button, and so on.

Continue all the way through until you have done the last module, then press CANCEL to complete and save your changes.

10-66 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

If you get to the position where there is an empty module slot, or a non-programmable module from the old days in that slot, press the SKIP button to move past it to the next module. You can do this as many times as needed.

When you’re done, the rack should be filled with all of the modules that are physically installed within this system, like this:

FILL (or CLEAR) One Module Procedure

FILL RACK is a great way to ensure that your modules are all addressed correctly, and we highly recommend it if you make several module exchanges at once. But there are times when you simply want to exchange one module with a different one, or perhaps to just remove a module. This is also quite easy once you know how.

Within DEWESoft, go to the ACQUISITION MODE and select the SETUP screen, where you can see your list of modules. This time, instead of clicking on the top of the AMPLIFIER COLUMN, double-click the amplifier column for the one module that you want to add, delete, or exchange. When you do this, the software will give you a similar choice as before:

And your choices are:

„

„

„

„

If you have plugged a new module into this slot, choose FILL, then follow the prompts.

If you change you mind and want to do a FILL RACK anyway, starting at slot 0, choose FILL FROM #0, then follow the prompts.

If there is a module in this slot that you have removed, but it continues to show up in RED (because the software cannot really find it), choose CLEAR to remove it from the list.

If you have clicked this by accident and want to cancel without making any changes, choose CANCEL

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, PAD | 10-67

Module Installation Trouble-shooting

There may be times when you have trouble addressing your modules, for a variety of reasons. Here are some good tips for solving these issues:

Problem: some or all modules are showing up in RED letters.

Analysis: a module shown in RED letters on the setup screen tells you that the software cannot find this module. Or, it can mean that there is a conflict with another module, like when you plug two modules with the same address into the system at the same time and don’t do a FILL RACK or FILL (or CLEAR) one of them. A very rare condition might be that a module is defective and cannot communicate properly.

Solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.

If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL

ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

Problem: you plug in a new module into a previously unused slot, but it does not show up.

Analysis: more than likely it was already set to an address that you were using, and it has either taken another module’s address, or is conflicting with it.

Solution: the trusty FILL RACK is always a great and easy way to solve nearly all these issues.

If the FILL RACK does not solve them, remove any modules shown in RED and add them back in one at a time, using the FILL

ONE MODULE procedure. Fill one module at a time until the offending modules’ addresses have been resolved.

Problem: you want to use a very old PAD module which does not have the upper black button on it, so you don’t know how to address it

Analysis: These modules have been out of production for a long time, but there are still some around, and they are still perfectly good modules.

Solution: Start with the old PAD module in the slot, but NOT PRESSED IN!! Make sure the connector on the inside is not mated or making contact in any way. Now double click on the amplifier slot where you want to install this module. Select FILL when prompted. Then when the next prompt appears to press the black button or push in the module... PUSH IN THE MODULE.

The green LED on its front panel should light up, and it should show up on the list on your SETUP screen.

Problem: some modules show up with the SERIAL NUMBERS in the amplifier column, and some do not.

Analysis: There is nothing wrong here. With each Dewetron module there is a certain revision before which the serial number was not available for external query, so these modules will not show this information on the setup screen.

Solution: N/A

10-68 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

PAD-V8-P Isolated 8-channel Voltage module

Module purpose:

Input ranges:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Interface boxes:

Voltage input module for DC/quasi-static signals

Selectable from ±100 mV to ±50V full-scale

6 Hz

350 VDC

25-pin D connector

PAD-CB8-BNC: 8 channel connector block, BNC

PAD-CB8-B: 8 channel connector block, banana jacks

V

PAD-v8-P specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input ranges:

Voltage

Current

Resolution:

Sample rate:

Read-out speed:

DC accuracy:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Input isolation:

Over-voltage protection

Common mode voltage:

NMR:

CMRR:

RS485 interface for module control/data:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

1) Depending on system and number of channels

PAD-V8-P

8 differential input channels

±100 mV, ±150 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V, ±50 V, -0.15 to +1.5 V

With external shunt resistor

10 µV for all ranges

12 Hz for all channels, maximum

Typical 80 channels/s

1)

±0.02 % of reading ±900 μV

6 Hz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

350 VDC (channel to channel, and input to output)

150 VDC

350 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz

120 dB @ 50/60 Hz

140 dB @ DC, 120 dB @ 50 Hz

Yes

9 VDC ±10 %

0.6 W typical

PAD-CB8-B and PAD-CB8-BNC break-out boxes

High quality break-out boxes are available for the PAD-V8-P module. The

PAD-CB8-B provides eight banana jacks, while the PAD-CB8-BNC provides eight BNC onnectors. Each one features a 2 meter long cable and connector that plugs into the face of the PAD-V8-P module. There are no electronics inside these break-out boxes.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, PAD | 10-69

Connector pin-outs

Pin

1

4

5

2

3

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Function

Channel 0 (+)

Channel 0 (-)

Channel 1 (+)

Channel 1 (-)

Channel 2 (+)

Channel 2 (-)

Channel 3 (+)

Channel 3 (-)

Channel 4 (+)

Channel 4 (-)

Channel 5 (+)

Channel 5 (-)

20

21

22

23

24

25

16

17

18

19

Pin Function

13

Channel 6 (+)

14

15

Channel 6 (-)

Channel 7 (+)

Channel 7(-)

Digital input 1*

Digital input 2*

Digital input 3*

+12 VDC

Reset / Digital input 4*

GND

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

* not supported in Dewesoft software

Mating connector

PAD-OPT2

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC breakout boxes, or as a building block to making your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers included.

10-70 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

PAD-TH8-P Isolated 8-channel Temperature module

Module purpose:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Interface boxes:

Thermocouples and RTD input module for DC/quasi-static signals

6 Hz

350 VDC

25-pin D connector

PAD-CB8-TH8-K-M: T/C K mini connectors, 2 meter cable

PAD-CB8-TH8-K-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable

PAD-CB8-TH8-J-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable

PAD-CB8-TH8-T-P2: T/C J mini connectors, 2 meter cable

PAD-CB8-RTD: RTD, 9-pin DSUB, 2 meter cable

PAD-TH8-P specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input voltage:

Input resistance:

Gain linearity:

Temperature drift:

Typical noise:

Resolution:

Sample rate:

Read-out speed:

DC accuracy:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Input isolation:

Over-voltage protection

Common mode voltage:

NMR (50/60 Hz):

CMRR (50/60 Hz):

RS485 interface for module control/data:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

1) Depending on system and number of channels

PAD-TH8-P

8 differential input channels

±1.5 V

1.4 MΩ

0.001%

30 ppm/°K

2 µV

10 µV for all ranges

12 Hz for all channels, maximum

Typical 80 channels/s 1)

Better than ±0.05 % ±200 μV (typ. ±0.03 % F.S. ±20 μV)

6 Hz (±1.5 dB @ f0)

350 VDC (channel to channel, and input to output)

15 VDC

130 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz

120 dB

130 dB

Yes

9 VDC ±10 %

0.6 W typical

PAD-CB8-K-xx series break-out boxes

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, PAD | 10-71

Above left: standard size PAD-CB8-K-P2 break-out box

Above right: miniature size PAD-CB8-K-M

Parameter PAD-CB8-J (or K or T)-P2 and PAD-CB8-J (or K or T)-M

Input channels:

Accuracy:

Typical noise:

8 thermocouple sensors (J, K, or T) with built-in CJC (cold junction compensation)

Thermocouple type J:

±1.0 °C @ -200 to -100 °C ±0.3 °C @

-100 to 150 °C ±0.4 °C @ 150 to 400

°C ±1 °C @ 400 to 1200 °C

±0.1 °C @ 6 Hz sampling; no average

Thermocouple type K:

±1.0 °C @ -200 to -25 °C ±0.4 °C @

-25 to 120 °C ±0.6 °C @ 120 to 400

°C ±1 °C @ 400 to 1372 °C

Thermocouple type T:

±1.0 °C @ -200 to -150 °C ±0.4 °C @

-150 to 400 °C

Operating temperature:

Cable length:

Dimensions:

-25 to +80 °C

2m (up to 12 m on request) approx. 196 x 57 x 32.2 mm (7.7 x 2.2 x 1.3 in.)

PAD-CB8-RTD break-out box

Parameter

Input channels:

Constant current:

Constant current drift:

Connection types:

Standard input ranges:

CB8-RTD-S3:

PAD-CB8-RTD

8 RTD sensors

1250 μA (CB8-RTD-S3: 250 μA)

5 ppm/°K

2-, 3-, and 4-wire

Resistor 0 to 999,99 Ohm, Pt100 a = 0.00385; Pt100 a = 0.003916; Pt200; Pt500; Ni120

Resistor 0 to 999,99 Ohm, Pt100 a = 0.00385; Pt100 a = 0.003916; Pt200; Pt500; Pt1000; Pt2000

10-72 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

PAD-DO7 Isolated 7-channel Relay Output module

Module purpose:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Important note:

Driving dry contact relays

300 VDC

25-pin D connector

This module is not supported by DEWESoft data acquisition software

PAD-DO7 specifications

Parameter

Output channels:

Relay type:

Max load:

Gain linearity:

Input isolation:

Relay on-time:

Common mode voltage:

RS485 interface for module control/data:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

PAD-DO7

7 relay output channels

Form “A” relay SPST N.O. with dry contacts

0.5 A (60 VAC) 1 A (24 VDC)

0.001%

300 VRMS

5 mS typical

130 VDC / 250 VAC @ 50 Hz

Yes

+12 VDC (±10%)

1.0 W typical

Connector pin-outs

10

11

12

7

8

5

6

9

Pin

3

4

1

2

Function

R1 NO

R1 COM

R2 NO

R2 COM

R3 NO

R3 COM

R4 NO

R4 COM

R5 NO

R5 COM

R6 NO

R6 COM

22

23

24

25

17

18

19

20

21

Pin Function

13

14

15

16

R7 NO

R7 COM

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

+12 VDC

Init

GND

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

* not supported in Dewesoft software

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, PAD | 10-73

Mating connector

PAD-OPT2

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

Convenient building block to making your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers included.

10-74 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

PAD-AO1 Isolated 1-channel Analog Output module

Module purpose:

Isolation:

Signal connection:

Important note:

Driving a DC analog output

300 VDC

25-pin D connector

This module is not supported by DEWESoft data acquisition software

PAD-AO1 specifications

Parameter

Output channel:

Output signals:

Voltage

Current

Resolution:

Accuracy:

Read-back accuracy:

Rad-back resolution:

Zero drift:

Voltage output

Current output

Span temp. coefficient:

Programmable output slope:

Current load resistor:

Isolation:

RS485 interface for module control/data:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

PAD-AO1

1 analog VDC output channel

0 to 10 V

0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA

12-bits

±0.1 % of FSR

±1 % of FSR

±0.02 % of FSR

±30 μV/°C

±0.2 μA/°C

±25 ppm/°C

0.125 to 1024 mA/sec or 0.0625 to 512 V/sec

500 Ω

300 VDC

Yes

+12 VDC (±10%)

1.2 W typical

OUT

Connector pin-outs

Pin

1

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

10

11

12

Function

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

20

21

22

23

24

25

16

17

18

19

Pin Function

13

Not connected

14

15

Not connected

Reserved

Reserved

IOUT (+)

IOUT (-)

VOUT (+)

VOUT (-)

Not used

GND

Not connected

Not connected

Not connected

* not supported in Dewesoft software

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, PAD | 10-75

Mating connector

PAD-OPT2

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

Convenient building block to making your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers included.

10-76 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-77

MDAQ Series Modules

MDAQ Series Common Information

Calibration information

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

„

„

„

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

This manual contains no calibration information. There are separate resources optionally available for MDAQ series modules for automated calibration under Met/CAL®. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software and instructions that you need to add to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.

General MDAQ module specifications

MDAQ modules are factory installed within your Dewetron system. From the outside you see only the input connectors. But inside, there is a BASE card which can hold any two 8-channel MDAQ-SUB modules on one side, and any MDAQ-FILT filter card on the other side. The result is a system which can be configured to suit a wide variety of applications.

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

10-78 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MDAQ-BASE-5 Mother Board

Every MDAQ assembly consists of a 16-channel MDAQ-BASE mother board and at least one MDAQ-SUB series 8-channel daughter card. Each MDAQ-BASE card can accept any two MDAQ-SUB cards, which are mounted next to each other on one side of the MDAQ-BASE. The other side of the MDAQ-BASE can accept any single Dewetron MDAQ-FILT series 16-channel filter card.

MDAQ-BASE-5 Details

The MDAQ assembly is factory installed according to your purchase order. Unlike DAQ modules, which can be freely plugged/ unplugged by the system user, MDAQ assemblies are not user-exchangeable. When your system is constructed at Dewetron, the

MDAQ assembly will be completely installed and tested.

TOP: MDAQ-SUB DAUGHTER cARDS (2)

MIDDLE: MDAQ-BASE MOTHER BOARD

BOTTOM: MDAQ-FILT cARD (OPTIOnAL)

MDAQ-SUB module dimensions:

Modules with BNC connectors:

Modules with DSUB connectors:

175 x 61 x 30 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 1.2 in.)

175 x 82 x 22 (6.9 x 3.2 x 0.9)

MDAQ-SUB output connector (for MDAQ-BASE mother board)

68-pin amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-79

Module

MDAQ-SUB-STG-D

Connector: DB9

V

MSI

MSI

V

MSI

MSI

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE-D

Connector: DB9

MSI

MSI

#

Chs

Input type Ranges

8

8

8

Strain gage (full, half, and

1/4 bridge, incl. shunt cal and balance) for strain gage applications

Voltage up to ±10V

IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC

Voltage via MSI-BR-V200

Thermocouples via MSI-BR-

TH-J, -K, -T

RTD via MSI-BR-RTD

Strain gage (full and half bridge) for strain gage sensors

Voltage up to ±10V

IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC

Voltage via MSI-BR-V200

Thermocouples via MSI-BR-

TH series

RTD via MSI-BR-RTD

Voltage up to ±200V

14 ranges from ±0.5 to 1000 mV/V

(@ 5V excitation)

15 ranges from ±2.5 V to ±10 V

7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V

6 ranges from ±10 to ±200 V

Full range of thermocouple type

-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ

14 ranges from ±0.5 to 1000 mV/V

(@ 5V excitation)

15 ranges from ±2.5 V to ±10 V

7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V

6 ranges from ±10 to ±200 V

Full range of thermocouple type

-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ

13 ranges from ±0.125 to ±200 V

2)

IEPE via MSI-BR-ACC

RTD via MSI-BR-RTD

7 ranges from ±0.25 mV to ±10V

-200° to 1000°C, and 0 to 6.5 kΩ

TEDS Bandwidth

High-pass

Filter

Excitation

√

BW: 30 kHz

HF: --

EX: 0 to 12 VDC

√

BW: 30 kHz

HF: 0.16 Hz

EX: 0 to 12 VDC

EX: ±15 VDC

√

BW: 300 kHz

EX: 0 to 12 VDC

EX: ±15 VDC

MDAQ-SUB-V200-D

Connector: DB9

V

MSI

MSI

MDAQ-SUB-V200-BNC

Connector: BNC

V

8 Voltage up to ±200V 13 ranges from ±0.125 to ±200 V --

BW: 300 kHz

HF: --

EX: --

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-BNC

Connector: BNC

8 IEPE or voltage up to ±10V 8 ranges from ±125 mV to ±10 V √

BW: 300 kHz

HF: 0.16 Hz

EX: 4/8 mA

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A-BNC

Connector: BNC

(same image as above)

8 IEPE or voltage up to ±10V 8 ranges from ±125 mV to ±10 V √

BW: 300 kHz

HP: 0.16 and

3.4 Hz

EX: 4/8 mA

-

1) When excitation is chosen on any channel of an MDAQ-SUB module, it is the same for all 8 channels of that module.

⇒

2) We recommend not exceeding 50Vrms on the DSUB input connector for safety reasons

10-80 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MDAQ-SUB-STG 8-channel Strain Gage/Bridge module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special functions:

Ranges:

Bandwidth:

Input configuration:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

Full bridge sensors, 1/2 bridge sensors, 1/4 bridge sensors,

Voltages up to ±10V, Potentiometric/ohmic sensors

Built-in bridge completion, built-in shunt resistors,

Software selectable auto-balance

Excitation programmable in 1 mV steps from 0 to 12VDC

Sense lines for the most accurate measurements

15 input ranges from ±2.5mV to ±10V

30 kHz

Differential (not isolated)

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

-D: Banana plugs (standard)

-L: 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)

V

MDAQ-SUB-STG specifications

Parameter

Gain:

Input ranges @ 5VDC excitation:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Typ. input offset drift:

DC Accuracy (High Gain)

±2.5mV;5mV/V;10mV/V;±25mV

20mV

50mV

±100mV to ±200mV

MDAQ-SUB-STG

0.5 to 2000

±2.5, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000, 1250, 2500, 5000, 10 000 mV ±0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20,

40, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000 mV/V

>100 MΩ

3.5 nV * √Hz

0.5 μV/K (for ranges < 200 mV)

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

(no correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

DC Accuracy (Low Gain)

±0.250 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5; 10V

Gain drift @ 5VDC excitation:

Excitation voltage:

Excitation accuracy:

Excitation drift:

Excitation protection:

Excitation current limit:

Bridge types:

Shunt resistor:

Completion and Shunt resistor accuracy:

Bridge resistance:

(with correction table applied) (no correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc] ±0.15% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±1mV

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

±0.15% of reading ±1mV

±0.15% of reading ±0.03% of range

10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K

0 to 12 VDC, programable in 1 mV steps. (5 VDC default)

±0.05 % ±0.7 mV

±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K

Continuous short to ground

50 mA/channel

4- or 6-wire full bridge

3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software selectable)

3- wire Quarter bridge with internal 120 Ohm and 350 Ohm completion (software selectable)

Internal 100 k and 50 k Resistor (software selectable)

0.05% 5ppm/°K

120 Ohm to 10 k Ohm

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-81

Parameter

Automatic bridge balance:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters (low-pass):

Typ. SNR @ 30 kHz [1 kHz] and

@ 5 VDC excitation

2.5mV to 20mV

25mV to 200mV

250mV to 1V

2V to 10V

Typ. CMR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and

@ 5 VDC excitation

Input isolation:

Common Mode Voltage:

Input over-voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

TEDS compatible 1)

Power consumption:

@ 5 VDC excitation

@ 5 VDC excitation

@ 10 VDC excitation

Standard operating temperature:

MDAQ-SUB-STG

Absolute Voltage

350 Ohm 16 Channels typ. 8 W

120 Ohm 16 Channels typ. 15 W

350 Ohm 16 Channels typ. 15 W

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F) mV/V @ 5V EXC

±10mV

±100mV

±0.5V

±5V

30 kHz

See MDAQ-FILT specification (option)

64 dB [82 dB] @ 1 mV/V

82 dB [96 dB] @ 50 mV/V

±2mV/V

±20mV/V

±100mV/V

±1000mV/V

125 dB [120 dB] @ DC

115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz

110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

N/A (input is differential but not isolated)

12V maximum

±25 VDC

±5 V

< 10 Ω

5 mA max.

Continuous short to ground

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433

μm/m @ 5VEXC

(k=2 quarter bridge)

±4,000μm/m

±40,000μm/m

±200,000μm/m

±2,000,000μm/m

1) When MSI modules are used, the TEDS interface is used by the MSI, and is not available to any sensor that you may connect

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

⇒

CAUTiON: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

⇒

if signals above 60 v may appear, don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector.

5

6

7

8

9

2

3

PIN

1

4

Function

EXC+

IN+

Sense -

GND

+15VDC (50 mA)

Sense +

IN-

EXC-

TEDS

10-82 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.

6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Half bridge signal connection

5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors

5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the MDAQ-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution. The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50

% of potentiometer position.

-

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-83

Quarter bridge signal connection

3-wire sensor connection

(Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor)

⇒

-

-

Sense leads (SUB-D: pin 3 and 6 must be connected!

‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

The 3-wire quarter bridge is only able to compensate symmetrical wire resistance

Other measurement modes and hook-ups

Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection

⇒

CAUTiON: if the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 v.

10-84 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Sensor with 15VDC supply, and voltage output

Why More Wires are Better...

Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with 6-wire technology this can be completely compensated!

Temperature drift:

2-wire

3-wire

4-wire

Intial error

Offset

25183 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

Sensitivity

-4.97 %

-2.6 %

0.0 %

Drift after 10°C warm up

Offset Sensitivity

956 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

-0.18 %

-0.01 %

0.00 %

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-85

10-86 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 8-channel Bridge module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special functions:

Ranges:

Bandwidth:

Input configuration:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

Full bridge sensors, 1/2 bridge sensors

Voltages up to ±10V, Potentiometric/ohmic sensors

Built-in bridge completion for half bridge

AC/DC coupling software selectable

Software selectable auto-balance

Several selectable excitation voltages

Sense lines for the most accurate measurements

15 input ranges from ±2.5mV to ±10V

30 kHz

Differential (not isolated)

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

-D: Banana plugs (standard)

-L: 8-pin LEMO connector (optional)

V

MDAQ-SUB-BRiDGE specifications

Parameter

Gain:

Input ranges @ 5VDC excitation:

Input impedance:

Input noise:

Typ. input offset drift:

DC Accuracy (High Gain)

±2.5mV;5mV/V;10mV/V;±25mV

20mV

50mV

±100mV to ±200mV

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE

0.5 to 2000

±2.5, 5, 10, 20, 25, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000, 1250, 2500, 5000, 10 000 mV ±0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20,

40, 50, 100, 200, 250, 500, 1000 mV/V

1 MΩ

3.5 nV * √Hz

0.5 μV/K (for ranges < 200 mV)

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

(no correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading ±15μV [±3μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±0.12% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.06% of range

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

DC Accuracy (Low Gain)

±0.250 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5; 10V

Gain drift @ 5VDC excitation:

Excitation voltage:

Excitation accuracy:

Excitation drift:

Excitation protection:

Excitation current limit:

Bridge types:

Completion and Shunt resistor accuracy:

Bridge resistance:

(with correction table applied) (no correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc] ±0.15% of reading 400μV [±80μV/V @5 Vexc]

±0.03% of reading ±1mV

±0.03% of reading ±0.03% of range

±0.15% of reading ±1mV

±0.15% of reading ±0.03% of range

10 ppm/K of range ±0.02 μV/V/K

0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5V (default) and 10 VDC (software selectable)

±0.05 % ±0.7 mV

±10 ppm/K ±50 μV/K

Continuous short to ground

50 mA/channel

4- or 6-wire full bridge

3- or 5-wire 1⁄2 bridge with internal completion (software selectable)

0.05% 5ppm/°K

120 Ohm to 10 k Ohm

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-87

Parameter

Automatic bridge balance:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Filters (low-pass):

Typ. SNR @ 30 kHz [1 kHz] and

@ 5 VDC excitation

2.5mV to 20mV

25mV to 200mV

250mV to 1V

2V to 10V

Typ. CMR @ 0.1 mV/V [1 mV/V] and

@ 5 VDC excitation

Input isolation:

Common Mode Voltage:

Input over-voltage protection:

Output voltage:

Output resistance:

Output current:

Output protection:

TEDS compatible 1)

Power consumption for 16 channels:

@ 5 VDC excitation

@ 5 VDC excitation

@ 10 VDC excitation

@ 10 VDC excitation

Standard operating temperature:

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE

Absolute Voltage

350 Ohm @ 10V Exc. typ. 15 W

120 Ohm @ 5V typ. 15 W

350 Ohm max. @ 15 W max.

120 Ohm @ 15 W

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F) mV/V @ 5V EXC

±10mV

±100mV

±0.5V

±5V

30 kHz

See MDAQ-FILT specification (option)

64 dB [82 dB] @ 1 mV/V

82 dB [96 dB] @ 50 mV/V

±2mV/V

±20mV/V

±100mV/V

±1000mV/V

125 dB [120 dB] @ DC

115 dB [110 dB] @ 400 Hz

110 dB [105 dB] @ 1 kHz

N/A (input is differential but not isolated)

12V maximum

±25 VDC

±5 V

< 10 Ω

5 mA max.

Continuous short to ground

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433

μm/m @ 5VEXC

(k=2 quarter bridge)

±4,000μm/m

±40,000μm/m

±200,000μm/m

±2,000,000μm/m

1) When MSI modules are used, the TEDS interface is used by the MSI, and is not available to any sensor that you may connect

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

⇒

CAUTiON: The sensor shield can be connected to either pin 4 (SUB-D version only) or the housing of the 9-pin SUB-D / 8-pin LEMO connector, depending on your application.

⇒

if signals above 60 v may appear, don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector.

5

6

7

8

9

2

3

PIN

1

4

Function

EXC+

IN+

Sense -

GND

+15VDC (50 mA)

Sense +

IN-

EXC-

TEDS

10-88 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Full bridge signal connection

6-wire and 4-wire sensor connection

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

Sense lines MUST be connected to the excitation also when 4-wire connection is used.

6-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

4-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Half bridge signal connection

5-wire and 3-wire sensor connection, and potentiometric sensors

5-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the sensor

3-wire sensor connection: Sense+ is connected to EXC+ at the connector

Voltage or Current excitation are allowed.

A potentiometer can be seen similar to a half bridge sensor with ±500 mV/V sensitivity. Therefore potentiometric sensors can be measured with bridge amplifiers. The advantages of using the MDAQ-STG for potentiometric measurements is by adjusting the offset and range, you can focus on a certain potentiometer position with higher resolution. The scaling is ±500 mV/V equals ±50

% of potentiometer position.

-

1) ‘R+’ has to be connected only if shunt calibration is required, otherwise it can be left unconnected.

-

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-89

Other measurement modes and hook-ups

Voltage and microvolt measurement signal connection

⇒

CAUTiON: if the excitation is not used for sensor supply it has to be deactivated by setting it to 0 v.

Sensor with 15VDC supply, and voltage output

Why More Wires are Better...

Sensitivity: For sensor wiring typically copper cables are used. For example a 120 Ω full bridge connected with four 0.14 mm2 cables will have an sensitivity error of 2.1 % due to the 1.27 Ω wire resistance. But with 6-wire technology this can be completely compensated!

Temperature drift:

2-wire

3-wire

4-wire

Intial error

Offset

25183 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

Sensitivity

-4.97 %

-2.6 %

0.0 %

Drift after 10°C warm up

Offset Sensitivity

956 μm/m

0 μm/m

0 μm/m

-0.18 %

-0.01 %

0.00 %

10-90 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MDAQ-SUB-V200 Differential Voltage Input module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special features:

Measuring ranges:

Bandwidth:

Input configuration:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

Voltages, and low currents with appropriate shunt

The DSUB version has sensor power on board, and is TEDS compatible

Low and high ranges from ±0.125 V to ±200 V

300 kHz

Differential (not isolated)

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

-BNC: BNC jacks (standard)

-D: 9-pin DSUB connector

MDAQ-SUB-v200 specifications

V

Parameter

Input ranges:

Divider OFF (higher voltage ranges)

Divider ON lower voltage ranges)

Input impedance:

DC accuracy: (Divider OFF)

±0.125 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5; ±10V

DC accuracy: (Divider ON)

±2.5 to ±20V

±25V; ±50V

±100; ±200V

Gain drift:

Input offset drift:

125 mV to 10 V (Divider OFF)

2.5 V to 200 V (Divider ON)

Over voltage protection:

-3 dB Bandwidth: (Divider OFF)

(Divider ON)

Channel separation @ 10 kHz:

CMRR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz) (Divider OFF)

(Divider ON)

Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz BW (Divider OFF)

±0.125 V and ±0.25 V

±0.5 V to ±10 V

±2.5 V and ±10 V

±10 V to ±25 V

±25 V to ±200 V

(Divider ON)

Programmable sensor supply (1)

Sensor supply accuracy(1)

Fixed sensor supply (1)

Output voltage:

Output impedance:

Output current:

MDAQ-SUB-V200

±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V (12 V max CMV)

±2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V, 20 V, 25 V, 50 V, 100 V, 200 V (250 V max CMV)

1 MΩ to GND, 2 MΩ differential

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading

±0.03% of reading

±0.02% of reading

±400 μV

±1 mV typ. 15 ppm/K (max. 40 ppm/K)

±0.03% of range

(with correction table applied)

±0.06% of reading

±0.03% of reading

±0.02% of reading

±8 mV

±20 mV

±0.03% of range

(without correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

400 µV

1 mV

±0.03% of range

(without correction table applied)

±0.25% of reading

±0.25% of reading

±0.25% of reading

8 mV

20 mV

±0.03% of range typ. 10 μV/K (max. 20 μV/K) typ. 100 μV/K (max. 200 μV/K)

±250 VDC

300 kHz (200 kHz at range 0.125 V and 1.25 V)

300 kHz (200 kHz at range 2.5 V and 25 V)

> 80 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

> 70 dB (> 56 dB)

> 87 dB

> 96 dB

> 84 dB

> 88 dB

< 93 dB

0 to 12 V short circuit protected;

50mA current limmitation ±0.05 % ±2 mV

±15 V (50 mA)

±5 V

5 Ω

±20 mA

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-91

Parameter

RS485 interface for module control:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Sensor connection:

TEDS support:

Standard operating temperature:

MDAQ-SUB-V200

Yes

±15 VDC typ. 4.5 W / 10 W

-BNC:

-D:

BNC connector, female

9-pin DSUB connector, female

Yes (-D model only!), compatible with chips DS2406, DS2430A, DS2432, DS2433

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

1) Applies to the MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D model only (DSUB connector)

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

MDAQ-SUB-V-200-BNC version

Hot: IN+

Shield: IN-

MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D version

See table >

⇒

if signals above 60 v may appear, don’t use the metal housing of SUBD connector.

⇒

Note - for safety reasons, refer to your local/government regulations about the maximum voltage that may be applied to BNC or DSUB connectors!

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4

5

PIN DSUB-9 connector

MDAQ-SUB-V-200-D module (typ x 8)

TEDS

IN+

Reserved

GND

+15V sensor supply

0 - 12VDC sensor supply (software programmable)

IN-

Reserved

-15V sensor supply

10-92 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MDAQ-SUB-v200 sensor connections

Sensor with differential output, module powered

Sensor with common ground

Loop-powered sensor, ext. shunt

Single-ended connection

Current measurement, external shunt

Potentiometric connection

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-93

Avoiding Common Mode issues

In contrast to isolated amplifiers the input common voltage range is limited at differential amplifiers. The measurement configuration below shows the possibilities to measure the current of a 24 V supplied system.

The optimum input range in that case is 500 mV. That will work fine for CH1 in the picture, but not for the CH0.

This channel will exceed the maximum common mode voltage and go into overflow.

With the MDAQ-SUB-V-200 module, there are several ranges which overlap between the 12V and 250V max

CMV ranges. This is intentionally done to provide you with more options when it comes to choosing the best possible fit of range/resolution/common mode.

The max. CMV is shown here within the software (analog channel setup dialog):

Notice that in the screen shot above left, the CMV is shown to be 12V max, whereas it is 250V max in the screen shot above right.

⇒

Always pay attention to the max CMv which is listed on the channel setup screen, when you select a given range within the software.

10-94 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MDAQ-SUB-ACC IEPE Accelerometer module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special features:

Modes:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

IEPE constant current accelerometers and microphones, and ±10V max. signals

Single ended or differential input mode

AC/DC coupling

300 kHz

N/A

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

BNC connector

V

MDAQ-SUB-ACC specifications

Parameter

Input voltage ranges:

Gain:

Input modes:

Input impedance:

DC Accuracy:

Gain drift:

Input offset drift:

Over voltage protection:

Voltage modes

±0.125 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5;10V

Max common mode voltage:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Channel separation @ 10 kHz:

CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):

Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz bandwidth:

Range ±0.125 V

Range ±0.25 V

Range ±0.5 V to ±1.25 V

Range ±2.5 V to ±10 V

Sensor excitation:

Current noise:

RS485 interface for module control:

Power supply voltage:

Output voltage:

Output impedance:

MDAQ-SUB-ACC

±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V

0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 40

IEPE or low voltage

Single-ended or differential

AC or DC coupling

1 MΩ

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading ±400 μV

±0.03% of reading

±0.02% of reading

±1 mV

±0.03% of range typ. 10 ppm/K (max. 20 ppm/K) typ. 3 μV/K (max. 12 μV/K)

IN+ differential ±40 V

IN- differential: max ±40 V

IN- Single ended: max 300 mA

12 V (differential mode)

300 kHz (200 kHz at range 1.25 V and 0.125 V)

> 96 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

> 87 dB

> 93 dB

> 96 dB

> 100 dB

4 or 8 mA, 5 % up to 24 VDC

150 nA * sqrt (Hz)

Yes

±15 VDC

±5 V

5 Ω

(without correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

400 µV

1 mV

±0.03% of range

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-95

Parameter

Power consumption:

TEDS support:

Standard operating temperature:

MDAQ-SUB-ACC typ. 10 W (max 12 W @ 8 mA sensor excitation)

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS 2406, DS 2430A, DS 2432, DS2433

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-BNC version

HOT: IN+

SHIELD: IN-

Typical Sensor Hook-ups

Above left: IEPE sensor mode Above right: Voltage input mode

For constant current powered sensors (IEPE) the current source is switched on and the minus input of the BNC is connected to GND. The input coupling is switched to AC. In this mode the TEDS interface circuit is activated so that it can read the sensor information from IEEE 1451.4 compliant sensors (the TEDS interface is disabled in the voltage mode).

In all voltage measurement modes the current source is disconnected from the input signal.

The position of the GND switch defines if the amplifier is used for differential or singled-ended input configuration. The allowed input voltage range (common mode voltage) is limited to 12 V.

-

-

NOTE: if floating input sources (like batteries) are connected to the MDAQ-SUB-ACC the amplifier has to be used in single ended configuration (GND-switch ON)! Otherwise the input may be out of the maximum input voltage range!

in differential mode as well as in single ended mode AC or DC coupling is possible. The standard high pass filter frequency is 3 Hz in AC-mode. Please contact DEWETRON for other frequencies.

⇒

The constant current supply (4 or 8 mA) that you set on one channel, will apply to all 8 channels of this MDAQ-SUB module. However, other MDAQ-SUB modules may be set to different constant current levels.

10-96 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A IEPE Accelerometer module

Sensor compatibilty:

Special features:

Modes:

Bandwidth:

Isolation:

Compatibility:

Signal connection:

IEPE constant current accelerometers and microphones, and ±10V max voltages

Two selectable high-pass filters

Single ended, AC/DC coupling

300 kHz

N/A

Plugs into any MDAQ-BASE card

-BNC: BNC connector

V

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A specifications

Parameter

Input voltage ranges:

Gain:

Input modes:

Input impedance:

DC Accuracy:

Gain drift:

Input offset drift:

Over voltage protection:

Voltage modes

±0.125 to ±1V

±1.25V; ±2.5V

±5;10V

Max common mode voltage:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Channel separation @ 10 kHz:

CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):

Typ. SNR @ 50 kHz bandwidth:

Range ±0.125 V

Range ±0.25 V

Range ±0.5 V to ±1.25 V

Range ±2.5 V to ±10 V

Sensor excitation:

Current noise:

RS485 interface for module control:

Power supply voltage:

Output voltage:

Output impedance:

Power consumption:

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A

±0.125 V, 0.25 V, 0.5 V, 1 V, 1.25 V, 2.5 V, 5 V, 10 V

0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, 20, 40

IEPE or low voltage

Single-ended only

AC or DC coupling

1 MΩ

(with correction table applied)

±0.03% of reading ±400 μV

±0.03% of reading

±0.02% of reading

±1 mV

±0.03% of range typ. 10 ppm/K (max. 20 ppm/K) typ. 3 μV/K (max. 12 μV/K)

IN+ ±40 V

IN- Single ended: max 300 mA

±12 V (differential mode)

300 kHz (200 kHz at range 1.25 V and 0.125 V)

> 96 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

> 87 dB

> 93 dB

> 96 dB

> 100 dB

4 or 8 mA, 5 % up to 24 VDC

150 nA * sqrt (Hz)

Yes

±15 VDC

±5 V

5 Ω typ. 10 W (max 12 W @ 8 mA sensor excitation)

(without correction table applied)

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

±0.15% of reading

400 µV

1 mV

±0.03% of range

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-97

Parameter

TEDS support:

Standard operating temperature:

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A

Yes, compatible with TEDS chips DS 2406, DS 2430A, DS 2432, DS2433

0 °C to 70 °C (32 °F to 158 °F)

Module Pin-outs (all 8 inputs are the same)

MDAQ-SUB-ACC-A-BNC version

Typical Sensor Hook-ups

Above left: IEPE sensor mode Above right: Voltage input mode

For constant current powered sensors (IEPE) the current source is switched on and the minus input of the BNC is connected to GND. In this mode the TEDS interface circuit is activated so that it can read the sensor information from IEEE 1451.4 compliant sensors (the TEDS interface is disabled in the voltage mode).

In all voltage measurement modes the current source is disconnected from the input signal.

The position of the GND switch defines if the amplifier is used for differential or singled-ended input configuration. The allowed input voltage range (common mode voltage) is limited to 12 V.

⇒

The constant current supply (4 or 8 mA) that you set on one channel, will apply to all 8 channels of this MDAQ-SUB module. However, other MDAQ-SUB modules may be set to different constant current levels.

10-98 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx Filter card

MDAQ-FILT-5-BE: Bessel characteristics

MDAQ-FILT-5-BU: Butterworth characteristics

16 Channel 2nd order low pass filter

5 selectable filters including bypass function

5 different cut off frequencies

Discrete low noise filter design

Independent filter settings for each channel

Direct control from MDAQ-xx Amplifier series

MDAQ-FiLT-5-Bx specifications

Parameter

Filter range (-3 dB):

Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BU

Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BE

Version MDAQ-FILT-5-BU-S1

Bypass bandwidth:

Filter characteristics:

MDAQ-FILT-5-Bx

30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass

30 Hz, 100 Hz, 300 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, bypass other frequencies optionally available

> 700 kHz

Attenuation slope:

Filter Accuracy:

DC gain:

Offset error:

Input voltage range:

Channel separation @ 50 kHz:

CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):

Input configuration:

Output configuration:

S/NR @ bandwidth:

Output impedance:

Output current:

Output connector:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

-BE model

-BU model

2-Pole Bessel

2-Pole Butterworth

40 dB/decade (12 dB/octave)

±1.5 dB @ fc

1 (0 dB)

Max. 1 mV (typ <0.2 mV)

Max. 0.02% of range with MDAQ-BASE-5

±10 VPP

> 96 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

Designed to work with MDAQ-BASE-5 mother board

Single-ended

> 100 dB

5 Ω

20 mA max.

68-pin Amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6), SCSI II Type

±7.5 V to ±15 V direct via MDAQ-BASE typ. 3 W

175 x 61 x 14 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 0.9 in.)

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, mDAQ | 10-99

MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx Filter card

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE: Bessel characteristics

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU: Butterworth characteristics

16 Channel 4th order low pass filter

5 selectable filters including bypass function

5 different cut off frequencies

Discrete low noise filter design

Independent filter settings for each channel

Direct control from MDAQ-xx Amplifier series

MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx specifications

Parameter

Filter range (-3 dB): version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S1 version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S2 version MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE-S1

Bypass bandwidth:

Filter characteristics:

MDAQ-AAF4-5-Bx

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 30 kHz, 100 kHz, bypass

163 Hz, 500 Hz, 2.5 kHz, 10 kHz, bypass, bypass

10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz, bypass

100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 30 kHz, bypass other frequencies optionally available

> 700 kHz

Attenuation slope:

Filter Accuracy:

DC gain:

Offset error:

Input voltage range:

Channel separation @ 50 kHz:

CMR @ 50 Hz (@ 1 kHz):

Input configuration:

Output configuration:

S/NR @ bandwidth:

Output impedance:

Output current:

Output connector:

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

-BE model

-BU model

4-Pole Bessel

4-Pole Butterworth

80 dB/decade (24 dB/octave)

±1.5 dB @ fc

1 (0 dB)

Max. 1 mV (typ <0.2 mV)

Max. 0.02% of range with MDAQ-BASE-5

±10 VPP

> 96 dB

> 94 dB (> 80 dB)

Designed to work with MDAQ-BASE-5 mother board

Single-ended

> 100 dB

5 Ω

20 mA max.

68-pin Amplimite series (AMP Nr. 174339-6), SCSI II Type

±7.5 V to ±15 V direct via MDAQ-BASE typ. 3 W

175 x 61 x 14 mm (6.9 x 2.4 x 0.9 in.)

10-100 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

General EPAD2/CPAD2 module specifications

Environmental:

Temp. range storage:

Temp. range operating:

Enhanced temperature range:

Rel. humidity (MIL202):

RFI susceptibility:

-30 °C to +85 °C (-22 °F to 185 °F)

-5 °C to +60 °C (23 °F to 140 °F) upon request and special order

0 to 95 % at 60 °C, non-condensing

±0.5 % span error at 400 MHz, 5 W, 3 m

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

EPAD2/CPAD2 Series Common information

Calibration information

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

„

„

„

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

EPAD2 RS-232/485 interface

EPAD2 series modules are controlled via RS-485 interface, and they require this interface for all data transfers

The DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 include an internal RS-232/485 converter and interface. This converter allows communication with all Dewetron signal conditioning modules. To communicate with the modules, the RS-

232 interface must be set to the following parameters: baud rate: 9600 data bits: 8 parity: no parity stop bits: 1 handshake: not required

CPAD2 CAN BUS interface

CPAD2 series modules are controlled via the industry standard CAN BUS over CAN 2.0b protocol, and they require this interface for all data transfers. CAN BUS is an option for both the DEWE-3210 and DEWE-3211 instruments, and must be installed at the factory in order for this interface to be available for CPAD2 connection.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-101

EPAD2 and CPAD2 series Modules

EPAD2 and CPAD2 overview

EPAD2 modules are external signal conditioning modules which connect to virtually any Dewetron system via the

RS485 interface, normally marked EPAD on your Dewetron system. It is marked this way on both the DEWE-

3210 and DEWE-3211 mainframes. However, EPAD2 series modules may also be connected to any computer using a small interface box called the EPAD-BASE2, which allows you to connect one or more EPAD2 modules to your computer’s RS232 or USB 2.0 interface.

CPAD2 modules are external modules which connect to any Dewetron system which has at least one CAN BUS interface. Unlike EPAD2 series modules which employ the RS485 bus for communication and data transfer, CPAD2 modules employ the CAN BUS for these functions.

Both EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are 100% compatible with Dewetron software. The following pages will show you how to connect and control these modules from within your system, as well as provide detailed specifications about these modules.

EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are available for measuring voltage, current, and temperature. Each module provides

8 inputs. They have a separate 24-bit ADC for each input channels, and provide galvanic isolation to avoid ground loops and common mode problems. They can be daisy-chained to add more and more channels to a single interface

(CPAD2 and EPAD2 modules cannot be chained together).

EPAD2 and CPAD2 modules are not meant for dynamic/AC signals, but are intended for slowly changing (quasistatic) and DC signals. They are the ideal way to add a moderate or even large number of slow channels to your

Dewetron system in an affordable and convenient way.

Further technical details can be found within the xPAD technical reference manual, a separate document.

All specifications within this manual are valid at 25 °C.

All modules are produced according to ISO9001 and ISO14001.

xPAD2 Series Calibration Information

All DEWETRON modules are calibrated at 25°C after a warmup time of 30 minutes and meet their specifications when leaving the factory. The time interval for recalibration depends on environmental conditions. Typically, the calibration should be checked once a year.

„

„

„

Calibration certificates are available from DEWETRON as an option. DEWETRON offers several types:

NIST traceable DEWETRON calibration certificate (USA CAL LAB only)

ISO traceable DEWETRON certificate (European CAL LAB only)

Calibration certificate according to ÖKD (equivalent to DKD)

This manual contains no calibration information. There are separate resources optionally available for MDAQ series modules for automated calibration under Met/CAL®. The CAL-KIT contains the required cables, software and instructions that you need to add to your own calibration lab. It does not include a calibrator or volt meter.

10-102 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Cross-reference of EPAD2 / CPAD2 modules

MODULE INPUT TYPE INPUT RANGES

EPAD2-TH8-x

CPAD2-TH8-x

(where x = J, K, T, U)

EPAD2-V8

CPAD2-V8

8 thermocouple connectors

Type J: xPAD2-TH8-P-J

Type K: xPAD2-TH8-P-K

Type T: xPAD2-TH8-P-T

Type U: UNIVERSAL

Type J: -210 to 1200 °C

Type K: -270 to 1372 °C

Type T: -270 to 400 °C

Type U: includes types K, J, T, E,

R, S, B, N, C, and U

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to

BUS, power and chassis)

8 isolated voltage input channels

Physical input range: ±50 V

Software selectable: ±100 mV,

±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V,

±10 V

ISOLATION

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to

BUS, power and chassis)

COMMENTS

Overvoltage protection:

15 VDC

Types J, K, T have typical accuracy of ±0.4°C

Type U (universal) has typical accuracy of ±1.4°C

Overvoltage protection:

350 VDC

DSUB25 connector - please order PAD-CB8-B or -BNC breakout boxes to complete this module

EPAD2-RTD8

CPAD2-RTD8

8 isolated Resistance

Temperature Detector

(RTD) channels

Resistor: 0 to 999.99 Ω

RTD:

PT100(385), PT200 (385),

PT500(385), PT1000 (385),

PT2000(385), PT100 (3961)

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to

BUS, power and chassis)

Overvoltage protection:

15 VDC

LEMO connectors

EPAD2-TH8-P

CPAD2-TH8-P

8 isolated voltage inputs

Supported breakout boxes:

PAD-CB8-x-P2 PAD-CB8x-M PAD-CB8-RTD

±1.5 V fixed

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to

BUS, power and chassis)

Overvoltage protection:

15 VDC

DSUB25 connector - please order PAD-CB8-J, K, T or

-RTD breakout boxes to complete this module

Overcurrent protection:

70 mA cont.

LEMO connectors

EPAD2-LA8

CPAD2-LA8

8 isolated current inputs 0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA, ±30 mA

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to

BUS, power and chassis)

Installing CPAD2 modules

After connecting a CPAD2 module to an unused CAN BUS interface on your Dewetron system, run DEWESoft and go to the HARDWARE SETTINGS screen, accessed under the

SETTINGS button. Then click on the CAN button.

Select the CAN interface that you connected the CPAD2 module to on that screen and set it to work with CPAD2 modules, as shown in the screen shot here.

If your software does not have this selection on the CAN screen, please obtain the CPAD2 plugin from Dewetron. This is a software addon that is free of charge with your CPAD modules. It was included on a DVD/CD disk when you purchased your CPAD2 module(s). Or it can be downloaded from our FTP site.

Additional CPAD2 series modules can be daisy-chained to the first module.

The last CPAD2 module must have the terminator plugged into the last open connector to ensure stable bus communications.

Terminator

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-103

Installing EPAD2 modules

When you purchase an EPAD2 module for an existing Dewetron system, you need to make a small change to the hardware setup of your system so that the EPAD2 is recognized by the software.

First, connect the EPAD2 to the EPAD connector on your system. If you plan to connect multiple EPAD2 modules, start with one first and then add the others one at a time.

When connected properly, the EPAD2 LED should light up, indicating that it is powered. If this does not happen, check your cabling and verify it with Dewetron if necessary.

Now run DEWESoft. Click the SETTINGS button near the top right of the screen and then click HARDWARE SETUP. Make sure you are looking at the ANALOG page of this dialog box. It looks like this:

Notice the area that we have drawn a red rectangle around in the screen shot above: this is where you need to input the number of EPAD2 modules that you want to add. Enter that number here. Then click OK to close this dialog box.

Click Ch Setup to see the list of ANALOG channels in DEWESoft. Scroll to the very bottom of this list and you will see that four empty channels have been added. Assuming that one EPAD2 module is connected already to the bus, double-click the first empty

EPAD2 channel in the list within the AMPLIFIER column:

Double-click here

The new empty channels are outlined in red above. Now DOUBLE-CLICK on the first amplifier button, that we have outlined in blue above. That will cause DEWESoft to pop up the question “what should be done with the module?”, at which point you should click the FILL button.

When you click FILL, DEWESoft will prompt you to press the black button on the EPAD2 module. Use a paperclip or thin pencil lead to do that, and the module will be addressed to this slot number, and it will show up here on the Setup screen. Use the SET

CH. button on the far right to configure the eight channels of this module.

Now connect the next EPAD2 module and repeat these steps, moving down to the next empty amplifier button, and so on, until all EPAD2 modules have been installed.

Be sure to plug the terminator into the last EPAD2 module (even if there is only one EPAD2 module).

10-104 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

EPAD2-TH8-X and CPAD2-TH8-X

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for thermocouple types J, K, T, and U (universal)

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input signals:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Bias current:

Open thermocouple detection:

Accuracy:

Thermocouple type J

Thermocouple type K

Thermocouple type T

Thermocouple type U

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-voltage protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

EPAD2-TH8-x and CPAD2-TH8-x

8 isolated thermocouple channels thermocouple types depending on module

J: -210 °C to 1200 °C

K: -270 °C to 1372 °C

T: -270 °C to 400 °C

U: Supports types K, J, T, E, R, S, B, N, C, and U

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

Standard “mini” thermocouple connector, polarized, color coded

Type K: yellow

Type J: black

Type T: blue

Type U: white

0.01 °C for all types typically 1.4 MΩ typically 10 nA module indicates fullscale if input is open

±1.0 °C @ -210 to -100 °C ±0.3 °C @ -100 to 760 °C

±1.0 °C @ -200 to -25 °C ±0.4 °C @ -25 to 1000 °C

±0.4 °C @ 760 to 1200 °C

±0.5 °C @ 1000 to 1372 °C

±1.0 °C @ -250 to -150 °C ±0.4 °C @ -150 to 400 °C

Varies according to the T/C type and range, but accuracy ±1.4 °C, typ. ±0.7 °C typically 20 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

15 VDC

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-105

Parameter

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

EPAD2-TH8-x and CPAD2-TH8-x

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

360 g typical

xPAD2-TH8-X Dimensions Connecting sensors

Use thermocouple sensors with standardized “mini” thermocouple connectors. This is a polarized connector with two flat blades, and one blade is wider than the other. Insert the plug correctly, and do not force the plug in the wrong way.

-

Connecting the thermocouple backwards will result in wrong readings.

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the

Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

2

3

PIN EPAD2

1 RS485 (A)

4

RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

LEMO EGG.1B.304

Above: typical thermocouple mini connectors, image courtesy of Omega.com

Use the correct type

Thermocouples are color coded according to international conventions.

-

Note: Our “universal” thermocouple input is cowwhite, to indicate that it is compatible with multiple thermocouple types.

10-106 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

EPAD2-V8-X and CPAD2-V8-X

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for voltages

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input ranges:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Bias current:

Linearity:

DC accuracy:

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-voltage protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

EPAD2-V8-x and CPAD2-V8-x

8 isolated voltage channels

Physical input range: ±50 V Software selectable: ±100 mV, ±500 mV, ±1 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

Standard “mini” thermocouple connector, polarized, color coded

Type K: yellow

Type J: black

Type T: blue

Type U: white

1µV for all ranges typically 1.4 MΩ typically 10 nA

0.001 %

±0.02 % of reading ±900 μV typically 25 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

15 VDC

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

310 g typical

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-107

xPAD2-v8-X Dimensions Connector pin-outs

Pin

1

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

10

11

12

Function

Channel 0 (+)

Channel 0 (-)

Channel 1 (+)

Channel 1 (-)

Channel 2 (+)

Channel 2 (-)

Channel 3 (+)

Channel 3 (-)

Channel 4 (+)

Channel 4 (-)

Channel 5 (+)

Channel 5 (-)

20

21

22

23

24

25

16

17

18

19

Pin Function

13

Channel 6 (+)

14

15

Channel 6 (-)

Channel 7 (+)

Channel 7(-)

Digital input 1*

Digital input 2*

Digital input 3*

+12 VDC

Reset / Digital input 4*

GND

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

* not supported in Dewesoft software

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the

Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

3

4

PIN EPAD2

1 RS485 (A)

2 RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

LEMO EGG.1B.304

Mating connector

PAD-OPT2

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

xPAD2-v8 signal interface connector

Normally this is where you plug in a break-out box, such as the PAD-CB8-B (banana jacks) or PAD-CB8-

BNC (BNC connectors). But in the event that you want to make your own cable, the pin-outs are here, and there is a convenient mating connector with screw terminals available for purchase.

Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC breakout boxes, or as a building block to making your own cable without soldering. Metal shell covers included.

10-108 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for RTD sensors

Supports 2-wire and 4-wire hook-ups

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input ranges:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Bias current:

Connection type:

Accuracy:

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-voltage protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8

8 isolated RTD channels

Resistor: 0 to 999.99 Ω

RTD: PT100(385); PT200(385); PT500(385); PT1000(385); PT2000(385); PT100(3961)

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

ERA.1S.304

0.01 °C for all types typically >100 MΩ typically 10 nA

2-wire, 4-wire (see diagrams on opposite page)

Pt100 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C

Pt100 a = 0.003916

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C

Pt200 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 800 °C

Pt500 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 250 °C typically 25 ppm/°C

Pt1000 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

15 VDC

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

Pt2000 a = 0.00385

±0.25 °C @ -200 to 100 °C

±0.4 °C @ 100 to 400 °C

±0.8 °C @ 400 to 600 °C

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-109

Parameter

Dimensions:

EPAD2-RTD8 and CPAD2-RTD8

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

310 g typical Weight:

xPAD2-RTD8 Dimensions xPAD2-RTD8 signal interface connector

3

4

Pin

1

2

Function

Excitation +

Sense +

Sense -

Excitation -

* Shield is on the housing

ERA.1S.304.CLL

RTD connections

2-wire hook-up

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the

Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

LEMO EGG.1B.304

3

4

PIN EPAD2

1 RS485 (A)

2 RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

4-wire hook-up

10-110 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for thermocouples or RTDs via

PAD-CB8 series break-out boxes

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input range:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Supported break-out boxes:

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-voltage protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

EPAD2-TH8 and CPAD2-TH8

8 isolated voltage channels (prepared for thermocouple or RTD interface boxes)

±1.5 V (fixed)

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

SUBD 25-pin connector - please order your choice of PAD-CB8-TH or RTD series break-out boxes

1µV typically 1.4 MΩ

PAD-CB8-x-P2 standard thermocouple breakout box (where x = J, K, or T)

PAD-CB8-x-M miniature size thermocouple breakout box (where x = J, K, or T)

PAD-CB8-RTD RTD breakout box typically 20 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

15 VDC

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

310 g typical

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-111

xPAD2-TH8 Dimensions Connector pin-outs

Pin

1

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

10

11

12

Function

Channel 0 (+)

Channel 0 (-)

Channel 1 (+)

Channel 1 (-)

Channel 2 (+)

Channel 2 (-)

Channel 3 (+)

Channel 3 (-)

Channel 4 (+)

Channel 4 (-)

Channel 5 (+)

Channel 5 (-)

20

21

22

23

24

25

16

17

18

19

Pin Function

13

Channel 6 (+)

14

15

Channel 6 (-)

Channel 7 (+)

Channel 7(-)

Reserved

Reserved

Reserved

+12 VDC

Reserved

GND

Reserved / CJC

Reserved / CJC

Reserved / CJC

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the

Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

3

4

PIN EPAD2

1 RS485 (A)

2 RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

LEMO EGG.1B.304

Mating connector

PAD-OPT1

25-pin SUB-D connector with screw terminals

(optional)

xPAD2-v8 signal interface connector

Normally this is where you plug in a break-out box, such as the PAD-CB8-B (banana jacks) or PAD-CB8-

BNC (BNC connectors). But in the event that you want to make your own cable, the pin-outs are here, and there is a convenient mating connector with screw terminals available for purchase.

Low cost alternative to the PAD-CB8-B and -BNC breakout boxes, or as a building block to making your own cable without soldering. CJC chip and metal shell covers included. CJC chip will be preinstalled for you on pins 23-24-25 (not shown in image above).

10-112 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8

Intelligent amplifier with integrated 24-bit A/D conversion

8 input channels for current measurements

Supports 0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA, and ±30 mA

Inputs isolated to 350 VDC

Modules daisy-chain together to add more and more channels

EPAD2 series uses RS485 interface

CPAD2 series uses CAN 2.0B interface

Specifications

Parameter

Input channels:

Input ranges:

Sample rate:

-3 dB bandwidth:

ADC type:

Input connector:

Resolution:

Input impedance:

Connection type:

Temperature drift:

Isolation voltage:

Over-current protection:

CMRR @ 50/60 Hz:

Interface:

Read-out speed:

Bus power connector:

Power supply voltage:

Power consumption:

Dimensions:

Base module (W x D x H)

Mounting holes distance:

Weight:

EPAD2-LA8 and CPAD2-LA8

8 isolated current input channels

0 to 20 mA, ±20 mA; and ±30 mA

12.5 S/s/ch maximum

6 Hz

Sigma delta ADC per channel, 24-bit

(Note: CPAD2 outputs CAN data at 16-bits)

LEMO EGB.1B.304

0.3 μA

50 Ω 0.1 %

2-wire, 4-wire (see diagrams on opposite page) typically 20 ppm/°C

350 VDC (channel to channel and channel to Bus, Power and Chassis)

70 mA continuous

130 dB

EPAD2 series: RS485

CPAD2 series: CAN BUS 2.0B protocol

EPAD2 series: typ. 80 ch/sec.

CPAD2 series: 12.5Hz, 10Hz, 5Hz, 2Hz, 1Hz, 0.5Hz, 0.2Hz or 0.1 Hz programmable

LEMO EGG.1B.304

7 to 40V

0.5 W maximum

129 x 72 x 34.2 mm (5.1 x 2.8 x 1.3 in.) incl. mounting holes

119 x 7 mm (4.7 x 0.3 in.), 4.2 mm (0.165 in.) diameter

360 g typical

xPAD2-LA8 Dimensions

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-113

xPAD2-LA8 signal interface connector

2

3

4

Pin

1

Function

Power supply +

Current +

Current -

Power supply -

* Shield is on the housing

EGB.1B.304

xPAD2 interface connector

There are two identical interface connectors for power and control. One is used to interface with either the

Dewetron system, or another xPAD2 module in a series. The other can be used to extend the daisy-chain another xPAD2 module from this one. The two connectors are interchangeable.

3

4

PIN EPAD2

1 RS485 (A)

2 RS485 (B)

+15V supply

GND

CPAD2

CAN high

CAN low

+15V supply

GND

LEMO EGG.1B.304

10-114 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-115

11

DEWE-3213 specifications

DEWE-3213 Input Specifications

Number of analog input channels

Input types directly supported

Input types supported via “smart”

MSI interfaces

Input types supported by passive adapters

Sample rate

Input type

Input ranges (voltage mode)

Over-voltage protection

Sensor supply voltages

Dynamic range

DC Accuracy

Input impedance

CMRR

Maximum CMV

Signal to noise

8

Full bridge and voltages up to ±10V

IEPE accelerometers: MSI-BR-ACC

Charge accelerometers: MSI-BR-CHA-50

Higher voltages: MSI-BR-V200

RTD sensors: MSI-BR-RTD

Thermocouples: MSI-BR-TH-J, K, and T

Half bridge: ADAP-BR-1/2-120, and -350 (Ω)

Quarter bridge: ADAP-BR-1/4-120, and -350 (Ω)

20 mA: ADAP-BR-SHUNT-20mA

5A: ADAP-BR-SHUNT-5A

Selectable from 1 kS/s/ch to 200 kS/s/ch simultaneous all 8 channels

Differential, not isolated

±0.01, ±0.1, ±1, ±10 V (AC or DC)

±70V input protection

12V, 400mA sensor supply (voltage mode)

±5V ±0.1% bridge sensor supply (bridge mode)

107 dB @ ±10V range

±10 V range: ±0.05 % of reading, ±1 mV

±1 V range: ±0.05 % of reading, ±0.2 mV

±100 mV range: ±0.05 % of reading, ±100 μV

±10 mV range: ±0.05 % of reading, ±100 μV

20MΩ || 47 pF (differential) 10MΩ| | 33pF (common mode)

> 80 dB (see separate CMRR section for further details)

±13 V common mode voltage

0.1kS/s to 51.2kS/s : 105 dB

51.2ks/s to 102.4kS/s: 100 dB

102.4kS/s to 200kS/s: 75 dB

DEWE-43 EXPANSION MODULE SPECIFICATIONS

Power requirements

Maximum sensor power supply

Interface to the computer

Operating temperature

Humidity

ESD protection

6-36 VDC

6 W

USB 2.0

-20 to +60°C

95% relative humidity, non-condensing

8000 V

10-116 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Signal Input Connectors

Analog input connectors (8)

Connector: 9-pin D-SUB (female)

Mating connector: 9-pin D-SUB (male)

Function: to input analog signals to the eight dynamic measuring inputs of the DEWE-3213. Note that mating connectors are available from Dewetron, from simple adapters from DSUB to BNC, to passive converters such as shunt adapters for current measurement and bridge completion adapters for 1/4 and 1/2 bridge measurements, as well as intelligent active interfaces for IEPE sensors, charge sensors, higher voltages, RTDs, and thermocouples.

See the MSI-BR series for details about active interfaces. See the ADAP series for details about passive adapters of various kinds.

Above right: a typical MSI-BR series smart interface.

⇒

-

Note: TEDS is available on the DEWE-3213 analog input connectors, for sensor interfacing. However,

MSi interfaces utilize the TEDS for MSi identification, therefore when an MSi interface is used, TEDS is no longer available for sensor use on that channel.

See the separate list of MSi and ADAP options available for the DEWE-3213’s analog inputs

Counter/encoder connectors (8)

Connector: LEMO EGG.1B.307CLAD52

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.1B.307CLAD52

Function: used to input tachometer, TTL level pulse train, or encoder outputs for measuring and conversion.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-117

-

Note: see the COUNTER configuration section later in this guide.

CAN BUS interface connectors (2)

Connectors: 9-pin D-SUB (male)

Mating connector: 9-pin D-SUB (female)

Function: used to connect to vehicle CAN BUS interfaces. Also can be used to read data from sensors which have a CAN BUS output.

-

Note: in addition to the CAN 2.0b protocol, the DEWE-3213 also supports J1939 and OBD ii protocols.

SYNC/Expansion connectors

There are sync and USB 2.0 connectors located in the EXPANSION group. Connections to at least USB and

SYNC are required required to connect a DEWE-43 expansion module.

⇒

The DEWE-43 can be powered separately, but it must be powered

⇒

The ground reference does not have to be connected, but it might improve noise performance

10-118 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Sync connector (1)

Connector: LEMO EGG.00.304.CLL

Mating connector: FGG.00.304CLAD27Z)

Function: required to allow a DEWE-43-V to be added as an expansion module, to the DEWE-3213. If you don’t connect the sync, the DEWE-43-V inputs will not show up in the hardware setup screen.

Power

Connector: LEMO EGJ.1B.302.CLA with spring loaded plastic cover

Mating connector: LEMO FGG.00.304CLAD27Z

Function: provides conditioned power to the DEWE-43-V expansion module only. 12VDC, 1.8A max.

USB 2.0 interface for DEWE-43-v only!

Connector: USB2.0 Standard-A receptacle

Mating connector: USB2.0 Standard-A plug, provided with the DEWE-43-V expansion module

Function: provides the USB interface to the DEWE-43-V expansion module

-

Note: use of the DEWE-43-v expansion module requires an upgrade of the data acquisition software within the DEWE-3213 from DEWESoft-7-SE to DEWESoft-7-PROF (or higher).

⇒

Note: Do not use these ports for anything EXCEPT connecting a DEWE-43-v expansion module!

⇒

When connecting a DEWE-43-v expansion module to the DEWE-3213, do NOT use the other USB connectors on the other side of the system. Use only this connector.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-119

Analog input configuration:

Block diagram of analog input (all analog inputs are identical):

The high input impedance (10MΩ ground referenced) has no distortion influence on the measured signal.

ADC:

The DEWE-3213 uses eight (8) delta-sigma A/D converters. If you sample with a data rate of 102.4 kS/s, the

ADC actually samples the input signal with 13.1072 MS/s (multiply the data rate with 128) and produces 1-bit samples which are applied to the digital filter. The filter expands the data to 24-bits and rejects signal parts greater than 51.2 kHz (Nyquist frequency). It also re-samples the data to the more conventional rate of 102.4 kS/s.

A 1-bit quantizer introduces many quantization errors to the signal. The 1-bit, 13.1072 MS/s from the ADC carry all information to produce 24-bit samples at 102.4 kS/s. The delta-sigma ADC converts from high speed to high resolution by adding much random noise to the signal. In this way the resulting quantization noise is restricted to frequencies above 100 kHz. This noise is not correlated with the useful signal and is rejected by the digital filter.

ADCs can only represent signals of a limited bandwidth. The maximum frequency you can represent is the half of the sampling rate. This maximum frequency is also called Nyquist frequency. The bandwidth between 0 Hz and the Nyquist frequency is called Nyquist bandwidth. Signals exceeding this frequency range can not be converted correctly by the sampler.

For example, the sample rate is 1000 S/s, the Nyquist frequency is 500 Hz. If the input signal is a 375 Hz sine wave, the resulting samples represent a 375 Hz sine wave. If a 625 Hz sine wave is sampled, the resulting samples represent a 375 Hz sine wave too. This happens because signals exceeds the Nyquist frequency (500 Hz).

The represented frequency of the sine wave is the absolute value of the difference between the input frequency and the closest integer multiple of the sampling rate (in this case 1000 Hz).

When the sampler modulates frequencies out of the Nyquist bandwidth back to the 0 to 500 Hz baseband it is called aliasing. Signals which are not pure sine wave can have many components (harmonics) above the Nyquist frequency. These harmonics are erroneously aliased back to the baseband, added to parts of the accurately sampled signal and produces a distorted data set. To block frequencies out of the Nyquist bandwidth, a lowpass filter is applied to the signal before it reaches the sampler.

10-120 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Each input channel has its two pole anti-alias lowpass filter with a cutoff frequency of about 250 kHz. The very high cutoff frequency allows an extremely flat frequency response in the bandwidth of interest and a small phase error. The analog filter precedes the analog sampler. The analog sampler operates at 256 times the selected sample rate for rates below 51.2 kS/s, 128 times for rates between 51.2 kS/s and 102.4 kS/s. For rates over

102.4 kS/s the oversampling is 64 times. That means, the ADC operates at 13.1072 MS/s if you select a sample rate of 102.4 kS/s (128 * 102.4 kS/s).

The 1-bit oversampled data is passed to a digital anti-aliasing filter. This filter has no phase error and an extremely flat frequency response. It also has an extremely sharp roll-off near the cutoff frequency (0.38 to 0.494 times the sample rate) and the rejection above 0.5465 times the sample rate is greater than 92 dB. The output stage of the digital filter resamples higher frequencies to 24-bit samples.

The digital filter passes only signal components within the Nyquist bandwidth or within multiples of the Nyquist bandwidth of 64, 128 or 256 times (depending on sampling rate). The analog filter rejects most noise near these multiples. The following diagrams show the frequency response of the input circuitry.

Sample rate 0.1kS/s to 51.2kS/s:

Sample rate 51.2kS/s to 102.4kS/s:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-121

Sample rate 102.4kS/s to 200kS/s:

The ADC samples at 64, 128 or 256 times the data rate (depending on the adjusted sample rate). Frequency components above one half of the oversampling rate (> 32, 64 or 128) can alias. Most of this frequency range is rejected by the digital filter. The filter can not reject components that lie close to integer multiples of the oversampling rate because it can not differentiate these components from components between 0 Hz and the Nyquist frequency. That means, if the sample rate is 100 kS/s and a signal component is between 50 kHz and 12.8 MHz

(128 x 100 kHz), this signal will be aliased into the passband region of the digital filter and is not rejected. The analog filter removes these components before they get to the digital filter and the sampler.

If aliasing is caused by a clipped or overranged waveform, (exceeding the voltage range of the ADC) it can’t be rejected with any filter. The ADC assumes the closest value to the actual value of the signal in its digital range when the signal is clipping. The result of clipping is also a sudden change in the signal slope and results in corrupt digital data with high-frequency energy. This energy is spread over the complete frequency spectrum and is aliased back into the baseband. Do not allow the signal to exceed the input range to avoid this.

Idle channel noise (input terminated with 50Ω):

10-122 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Spectral noise - 50Ω termination – 8 averages – 16k lines@50kS/s:

Spectral noise - 50Ω termination – 10 averages – 16k lines@100kS/s:

Spectral noise - 50Ω termination – 10 averages – 16k lines@200kS/s:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-123

CMRR:

All eight analog channels of the DEWE-3213 are fully differential inputs with resistance of 10MΩ || 10pF. The input voltage range is ±10V, ±1V, ±100mV and ±10mV. Because of the differential input structure, the difference of the input (Ch x(+) – Ch x(-)) will be shown as the result of the measurement. Although the input is protected for input voltages to ±70V, the common voltage range of each input is limited to about ±13V. If the input voltage exceeds this range, the result is not valid even when the difference input voltage is lower than current input range.

These voltage ranges will be clipped and introduced as large errors that can be easily identified in frequency spectrum. The figure bellow show the allowable common-mode input voltages for various input voltages and measurement ranges.

10-124 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

For example: Many signal sources (function generators) and power supplies are floating sources. That means that they are isolated from each other and from AC power line. If we connect a sensor with differential output and floating power supply to measurement device, then GND of sensor and measurement device can have different voltage potential. This is what the measurement device see as common- mode voltage. This common-mode voltage can range from few volts to few hundred volts, but in almost all cases this renders the measurement. To prevent this effect, GND signals of the sensor and measurement device need to be directly connected. That way we eliminate common-mode voltage. On DEWE-3213 this connection is possible over connector GND wire or over

“Common GND” receptacle on the housing.

Counter and digital inputs:

The DEWE-3213 is suited with synchronous 32-bit advanced counter and digital inputs. In addition to the basic counter function like simple event counting, up/down counting and gated event counting also period time, pulse width, two- edge separation, frequency and all encoder measurements are supported. All counter inputs can also be used as digital inputs. In addition to the basic counter input selections, ADC Clock can also be used as counter source. The figure bellow shows the block diagram of the counter and input overvoltage protection.

⇒

Detailed technical specifications for data acquisition components, such as ORiON series A/D cards, DAQ and MDAQ series signal conditioning, and various other interfaces, can be found in their respective technical reference manuals.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 10, CONDITIONERs, EPAD2/CPAD2 | 10-125

10-126 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

ORION Overview

To create instruments with dozens or even hundreds of dynamic channels, multiple ORION cards can be installed within a single unit. All cards are synchronized via the internal sync-bus to ensure absolute simultaneous sampling of all channels.

„

„

„

„

„

„

Key Features

Simultaneous sampling

Separate A/D converter channel

Dozens of different models

Synchronized analog, digital, counter and CAN inputs

Clock output for synchronizing external devices, e.g. video cameras

Sync option for synchronizing multiple systems or synchronize to IRIG or GPS

Multiple Dewetron instruments can be hardware-synchronized using the ORION-SYNC option. Depending on distance and local preconditions there are several choices how to use this option.

You can connect your instruments via standard CAT6 cables, over short distances. The maximum length depends on the sampling rate and the A/D technology, and ranges between 30 m to 200 m. This requires that the ORION-

SYNC option was factory installed when each system was made.

For large distances which do not allow physical connection of the instruments, synchronization can be achieved using GPS or IRIG time codes. This requires that the Dewetron systems have either the IRIG-CLOCK or GPS-

CLOCK option installed internally, or connected externally (order IRIG-CLOCK-INT or GPS-CLOCK-INT for factory-installed internal interfaces, or the IRIG-CLOCK-EXT or GPS-CLOCK-EXT for field-installed external interfaces).

The driver design enables total continuous gap-free disk storing rates of more than 100 MB/s. Today standard computers with a single hard disk reach continuous gap-free storing rates between 50 MB/s and 80 MB/s.

A/D Technologies within the ORiON series

Delta-Sigma Converter

This technique is used in the ORION cards with 22 and 24-bit A/D converters. Of course, 24-bit converters offer highest dynamic range (up to 120 dB).

Whenever you choose a sampling rate, the used internal sampling rate is up to 512 times higher. Using this over-sampling technique full anti-aliasing protection is guaranteed. These boards can not be external clocked, but synchronized from board to board and also synchronized to GPS clock using the DEWE-GPS-CLOCK or to IRIG time using DEWE- IRIG-CLOCK.

Flash Converter

This technique is used in all ORION cards with 16-bit A/D converters, as well as MI and AD series boards.

Flash converters offer the fastest sampling rates (up to 1 MS/s/ch) as well as the possibility for external clocking.

This is required for external clocked applications like distance related A/D conversion, combustion analysis as well as order tracking applications (using hardware order tracking clocked by an encoder).

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 11, A/D CARDs | 11-1

11

A/D Cards

There are several A/D cards which may be installed into your Dewetron system, depending on how it was ordered from the factory. For traditional data acquisition applications, there are essentially two series of A/D cards available:

ORION series - simultaneous sampling, high-end performance, including synchronous counter/encoder inputs on board, and offering options such as CAN BUS interfaces, isolated counters and digital input lines, and more.

ORION series cards represent the state of the art within the Dewetron family. They were designed from the ground up to allow 100% synchronization, not just within one system but across multiple systems, whether they are physically connected, or separated by thousands of miles.

AD series - multiplexed sampling, medium performance, with basic counters and digital input lines. No options (if

CAN BUS interfaces are needed, for example, they can be added via a separate PCI card within your system).

This section will present the basic specifications for all commonly installed ORION and AD series cards. Additional information is available in Dewetron manuals specific to these cards, available as separate documents.

ORION series Cards

ORION cards cross-reference

Series Chs Voltage ranges Res.

Max kS/s/ch

ADC type DI chs DI/Os Ctr/Enc CAN

ORION-0424-200

ORION-0824-200

ORION-1624-200

ORION-1622-100

ORION-3222-100

ORION-0816-1000

ORION-1616-100

ORION-3216-100

ORION-1616-500

4

8

16

32

16

16

16

32

8

±0.1 V, ±0.5 V, ±2 V, ±10 V

IEPE®: 4 mA / 8 mA excitation

±0.1 V, ±0.5 V, ±2 V, ±10 V

IEPE®: 4 mA / 8 mA excitation

±10 V

±10 V

±10 V

±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V

±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V

±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V

±1.25 V, ±2.5 V, ±5 V, ±10 V

24-bit 204.8

24-bit 204.8

24-bit 204.8

22-bit 100

22-bit 100

16-bit 1000

16-bit 100

16-bit 100

16-bit 500

D/Sigma

D/Sigma

D/Sigma

D/Sigma

D/Sigma

SAR

SAR

SAR

SAR

---

8 to 40 8

8 to 40

8 to 40

8 to 24

8 to 40

8 to 40

8 to 24

8 to 40

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

1 (ADV)

2 to 10 (ADV)

2 to 10 (ADV)

2 to 10 (ADV)

2 to 10 (ADV)

2 to 10

2 to 10

2 to 10

2 to 10

--

0 or 2

0 or 2

0 or 2

0 or 2

0 or 2

0 or 2

0 or 2

0 or 2

11-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

ORION card implementation notes

Combining various ORiON cards

ORION cards with different bit resolutions, or different max sample rates, cannot be mixed within the same system. In other words, you cannot install an ORION-0816-1000 and an ORION-1616-100 in the same system, because they have different max sample rates. Nor can you mix ORION-1616-100 with ORION-1622-100.

However, there is no problem to mix the ORION-3216-100 with ORION-1616-100 cards, because they have the same bit resolution and the same max sample rate. (The ORION-3216-100 is an ORION-1616-100 card with an add-on of 16 more channels, so they are essentially the same card anyway).

Also there is no problem to mix multiples of the same card, but which have different last digits. Therefore you may install an ORION-1624-200, ORION-1624-202, and ORION-1624-205 in the same system.

Synching ORiON cards

If multiple compatible ORION cards are installed in the same system, they must be interconnected with a sync cable. A standard 10-pin connector with 1.27 mm flat ribbon cable is available for easy connection between the boards.

-

One card must be set as the master, and the others as slaves.

This is done at the driver level.

Synching Multiple systems

If multiple systems or PCI expansion systems are used, a sync bus option must be installed. This option decouples the internal sync bus with the external sync I/O connector. By changing the internal TTL sync bus levels from TTL to RS-422 level, the distance between two systems can be increased by up to 50 meters using by using standard

CAT5/CAT6 Ethernet cables (greater distances are possible - please contact Dewetron to discuss).

„

The ORION-DAQ-SYNC option is required for Dewetron 16-bit ORION cards.

„

The ORION-DSA-SYNC option is required for Dewetron 22- and 24-bit ORION cards.

The SYNC option also includes the security circuit if two master systems have to be connected together over the sync bus connection. As soon as the system is configured to a master system the external sync is ignored by disabling the SYNC-IN amplifier. The LED labeled MI (master internal) indicates if the system is configured to a master system. ME (master external) will light up if a valid sync signal is being received on the SYNC-IN connector.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 11, A/D CARDs | 11-3

Above: schematic of ORION-XXX-SYNC option

-

Note - if you plan on adding more compatible Dewetrons and hardware synchronizing them like this, it is highly recommended to have the sync option installed at the factory. it is difficult to add later.

Opto-coupler emitter

Opto-collector

System on

Power +5V

Power GND

SYNC IN

ME/MI LEDs (2)

SYNC OUT

To ORION card sync bus interface

In addition to the synchronization function the ORION-xxx-SYNC allows also the remote power-on of any connected slave system. When the master is powered on, an opto coupler output (PC817) is activated to switch on the power supply of the slave system. The remote power on also can be controlled with an external control voltage

(+5 V@Sys-On). Systems with this option typically have a three way power switch labeled ON, OFF, and SLAVE

ON. In this third mode, the system can be powered on remotely if connected to a master. This is very convenient for powering on everything at once, and in the correct order.

On-board RS-485 interface

ORION cards are equipped with an RS-485 interfaced as standard. The baud-rate is fixed to 9600, 8 data, 1 stop bit and no parity. This interface is used for configuration of DAQ, MDAQ, and HSI signal conditioning modules. In addition, PAD and EPAD2 series modulescan also be handled.

Therefore there is no need for an additional serial interface for module control when ORION cards are used within your system.

In DEWESoft you need to access the HARDWARE SETUP screen, and make sure that “ORION onboard” is selected as the module control interface, as shown in the screen shot at right.

11-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

ORION-0424-200

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

4 simultaneous sampled channels, BNC connection

Voltage or IEPE® mode (4 mA or 8 mA source)

4 input ranges (from ±0.1 V to ±10 V)

Input coupling DC or AC (0.15 Hz or 3.4 Hz)

204.8 kS/s per channel

24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter

TEDS (IEEE 1451) sensor support

Model Overview

Model Analog chs

Max kS/s/ ch

Digital input chs

--

Digital

I/O

Ext clock Ext. trigger

--1

Counter/ encoder

TTL

--

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

1

CAN

BUS

-ORION-0424-200 4

Top Level Specifications

204.8

Parameter

Number of analog input channels:

Input configuration:

Resolution:

Specification

4, simultaneously sampled

Symmetric, differential or single ended

24 bit, nominal

Type of ADC:

Sample rate:

Delta-sigma

204.8 kS/s/ch maximum

Input signal range: ±10V, ±2V, ±0.5V, ±0.1V peak

Input impedance (ground ref.):

Positive to negative input 1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND

Over-voltage protection: ±30V on both positive and negative inputs

Alias-free bandwidth (passband):

1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s

51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s

102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s

Dimensions:

Form factor:

Analog input connector:

DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs

17.5 x 10.7 cm (6.9 x 4.2 in.) (not including connectors)

Half length PCI card

BNC

Counter input connector:

Environmental:

DSUB 9-pin connector, male

T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 11, A/D CARDs | 11-5

„

„

„

„

„

„

ORION-0824-200

8 simultaneous sampled channels

Voltage or IEPE® mode (4 mA or 8 mA source)

Synchronous digital inputs

204.8 kS/s per channel

24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter

6 models available with many options

Model Overview

Model Analog chs

ORION-0824-200

ORION-0824-201

ORION-0824-202

ORION-0824-203

ORION-0824-204

ORION-0824-205

Top Level Specifications

8

8

8

8

8

8

Max kS/s/ ch

Digital input chs

Digital

I/O

Ext clock Ext. trigger

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

2 (8*) 8

2 (8*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

--

--

--

--

--

--

1

1

1

1

1

1

8

--

--

8

--

Counter/ encoder

TTL

--

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

2

2

2

2

2 + 8

2 + 8

CAN

BUS

2

--

2

--

2

--

Parameter

Number of analog input channels:

Input / Resolution / ADC type:

Sample rate:

Input signal range:

Input impedance (ground ref.):

Over-voltage protection:

Alias-free bandwidth (passband):

1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s

51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s

102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s

Specification

8, simultaneously sampled

Symmetric, differential or single ended / 24 bit, nominal / Sigma-delta

204.8 kS/s/ch maximum

±10V, ±2V, ±0.5V, ±0.1V peak

1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND (Positive to negative input)

±30V on both positive and negative inputs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs

Form factor:

Analog input connector:

Half length PCI card

68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)

Environmental: T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

11-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

„

„

„

„

„

„

ORION-1624-200

16 simultaneous sampled channels

±10V input range

Synchronous digital inputs

204.8 kS/s per channel

24 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter

6 models available with many options

Model Overview

Model Analog chs

ORION-1624-200

ORION-1624-201

ORION-1624-202

ORION-1624-203

ORION-1624-204

ORION-1624-205

Top Level Specifications

16

16

16

16

16

16

Max kS/s/ ch

Digital input chs

Digital

I/O

Ext clock Ext. trigger

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

204.8

2 (8*) 8

2 (8*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

--

--

--

--

--

--

1

1

1

1

1

1

Counter/ encoder

TTL

2

2

2 + 8

2 + 8

2

2

--

8

--

--

8

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

--

CAN

BUS

2

--

2

--

2

--

Parameter

Number of analog input channels:

Input / Resolution / ADC type:

Sample rate:

Input signal range:

Input impedance:

Over-voltage protection:

Alias-free bandwidth (passband):

1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s

51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s

102.4 kS/s < fs ≤ 200 kS/s

Specification

16, simultaneously sampled

Symmetric, differential / 24 bit, nominal / Sigma-delta

204.8 kS/s/ch maximum

±10 V

10 MΩ in parallel with 60 pF (both positive and negative inputs)

±30V on both positive and negative inputs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.22 fs

Form factor:

Analog input connector:

Half length PCI card

68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)

Environmental: T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 11, A/D CARDs | 11-7

ORION-1622-100 and ORION-3222-100

„

„

16 or 32 simultaneous sampled channels

±10 V inputs

„

„

Synchronous digital inputs

100 kS/s per channel

„

22 bit resolution, anti-aliasing filter

„

8 models available with many options

Model Overview

Model Analog chs

ORION-1622-100

ORION-1622-101

ORION-1622-102

ORION-1622-103

ORION-1622-104

ORION-1622-105

ORION-3222-100

ORION-3222-101

Top Level Specifications

16

16

16

32

32

16

16

16

Max kS/s/ ch

Digital input chs

Digital

I/O

Ext clock Ext. trigger

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

102.4

2 (8*) 8

2 (8*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

18 (24*) 8

18 (24*) 8

--

1

--

--

1

--

--

--

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

Counter/ encoder

TTL

2

2

2 + 8

2 + 8

2

Parameter

Number of analog input channels:

Input / Resolution / ADC type:

Sample rate:

Specification

16 or 32, simultaneously sampled

Symmetric, single ended w/remote sense / 22 bit nominal / Sigma-delta

102.4 kS/s/ch maximum

Input signal range:

Input impedance (ground ref.):

Over-voltage protection:

Alias-free bandwidth (passband):

Form factor:

1 kS/s ≤ fs ≤ 51.2 kS/s

51.2 kS/s < fs ≤ 102.4 kS/s

±10 V

1 MΩ each with 60 pF to GND

±30V

DC (0 Hz) to 0.42 fs

DC (0 Hz) to 0.32 fs

Half length PCI card

Analog input connector:

Environmental:

68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)

T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

8

--

--

--

8

--

--

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

--

CAN

BUS

2

--

2

--

2

--

2

--

11-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

„

„

„

„

„

„

ORION-0816-1000

8 simultaneous sampled channels

Four input ranges ±1.25, ±2.5, ±5 or ±10 V

Synchronous digital inputs

1 MS/s per channel

16 bit resolution

6 models available with many options

Model Overview

Model Analog chs

ORION-0816-1000

ORION-0816-1001

ORION-0816-1002

ORION-0816-1003

ORION-0816-1004

ORION-0816-1005

Top Level Specifications

8

8

8

8

8

8

Max kS/s/ ch

Digital input chs

Digital

I/O

Ext clock Ext. trigger

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

1000

2 (8*) 8

2 (8*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

10

10

10

10

Counter/ encoder

TTL

2

--

--

--

--

--

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

--

CAN

BUS

2

--

2

--

2

--

Parameter

Number of analog input channels:

Input / Resolution / ADC type:

Sample rate:

Input signal range:

Input impedance:

Over-voltage protection:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Specification

8, simultaneously sampled

Single ended w/remote sense / 16 bit (14.7 bit effective) / Successive approximation

1000 kS/s/ch maximum

±1.25, ±2.5, ±5 or ±10 V

10 MΩ parallel (3.9 kΩ + 10 pF)

±30V

600 kHz

Form factor:

Analog input connector:

Half length PCI card

68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)

Environmental: T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 11, A/D CARDs | 11-9

„

„

„

„

„

„

ORION-1616-100 and ORION-3216-100

16 or 32 simultaneous sampled channels

Four input ranges ±1.25, ±2.5, ±5 or ±10 V

Synchronous digital inputs

100 kS/s per channel

16 bit resolution

8 models available with many options

Model Overview

Model Analog chs

ORION-1616-100

ORION-1616-101

ORION-1616-102

ORION-1616-103

ORION-1616-104

ORION-1616-105

ORION-3216-100

ORION-3216-101

Top Level Specifications

16

16

16

32

32

16

16

16

Max kS/s/ ch

Digital input chs

Digital

I/O

Ext clock Ext. trigger

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

2 (8*) 8

2 (8*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

10 (40*) 8

18 (24*) 8

18 (24*) 8

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

Counter/ encoder

TTL

2

2

2 + 8

2 + 8

2

8

--

--

--

8

--

--

Counter/

Encoder

ADJ

--

CAN

BUS

Parameter

Number of analog input channels:

Input / Resolution / ADC type:

Sample rate:

Input signal range:

Input impedance:

Over-voltage protection:

-3 dB Bandwidth:

Specification

16 or 32, simultaneously sampled

Single ended w/remote sense / 16 bit (14.7 bit effective) / Successive approximation

100 kS/s/ch maximum

±1.25, ±2.5, ±5 or ±10 V

10 MΩ parallel (3.9 kΩ + 10 pF)

±30V

100 kHz

Form factor:

Analog input connector:

Half length PCI card

68-pin SCSI male (AMP 174341-5)

Environmental: T.

OP

: 0 to 50°C, T.

STORE

: -20 to 70°C; RH: 10 to 90 %, non-condensing

For complete details, please see the detailed manual for this card, available as a separate document.

2

--

2

--

2

--

2

--

11-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

ORiON card Windows driver

Every PCI card requires a driver so that Windows knows how to implement it. 99% of the time, ORION cards are factory installed, and thus we install the drivers for you. If you are adding a second compatible ORION card to your system, then the drivers are already installed. However, if you are installing one or more ORION cards into a new computer, please contact Dewetron for the latest Windows driver.

installing ORiON cards

Please see the manual provided with your new ORION card for complete installation instructions. It is beyond the scope of this manual to describe that for all of the different ORION cards that we offer.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 11, A/D CARDs | 11-11

AD series Cards

AD cards Cross-reference

Series Chs Voltage ranges

AD16-1000-16

AD16-1000-16-OUT2

AD32-1000-16

AD32-1000-16-OUT4

AD64-1250-12

AD64-100-16

16

16

32

32

64

64

±100 mV to ±10 V

±100 mV to ±10 V

±100 mV to ±10 V

±100 mV to ±10 V

±50 mV to ±10 V

±100 mV to ±10 V

Res.

Max kS/s/ch

16-bit 62.5

16-bit 62.5

16-bit 31.25

16-bit 31.25

12-bit 19.5

16-bit 1.5

ADC type DI chs DI/Os Counters

(simple)

Flash/MUX 8 8 2

Flash/MUX

Flash/MUX

Flash/MUX

Flash/MUX

Flash/MUX

8

8

8

--

--

8

8

8

--

--

2

2

2

--

--

Analog outs

--

2

--

4

2

--

All AD series cards are standard half-length size PCI cards. They are factory installed within your Dewetron system when it is made. Since it is not possible for them to also have CAN BUS interfaces on them, if you require CAN BUS interfaces, please order the PCI-CAN/2 option, which is a two channel high-speed CAN BUS interface card.

AD series cards are much lower cost and thus lower performance than the ORION series. The counters, for example, are simpler and less capable than ORION counter/encoder inputs.

Still, AD series cards are perfectly adequate for many data acquisition applications, when interchannel phase match does not have to be perfect via simultaneous sampling, and multiplexed A/D performance is acceptable.

100% LabviEW compatibility

AD series cards are 100% supported in LabVIEW, since they are made by National Instruments. Therefore, these are the ideal cards if you are planning to develop your own software for the Dewetron platform, and we strongly recommend them.

Calibration

When it comes time to calibration your AD series cards, this can be done by Dewetron, or you can send the card to

National Instruments.

11-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

AD cards technical information

Since AD series A/D cards are made by National Instruments, please refer to the website www.ni.com

for technical details related to these cards.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-1

12

Interface Cards

There are several key interface cards that are available for your Dewetron instrument. These include time code interfaces based on IRIG or GPS, as well as BUS interface cards for popular data busses such as ARINC 429,

MIL-STD-1553, NTSC/PAL video input, and more.

Please see the next pages for basic information about these interface cards. Additional details can be found in the manuals specific to each card, as provided with your system.

IRIG-CLOCK time code interface card

The purpose of the IRIG-CLOCK is to synchronize the data acquisition performed by your Dewetron system with an absolute time reference widely used by the US military and NASA known as IRIG (Inter Range Instrumentation Group).

The IRIG-CLOCK-INT is a small printed circuit board that is factory installed within the Dewetron chassis, and wired internally to the USB interface, power, and to the clock input of the master A/D card. There is also an external version of this IRIG interface known as the IRIG-CLOCK-EXT. This section will focus on the internal version, since this is far more common, and the architecture is identical between the two.

The following block diagram gives a basic overview of the functionality of this interface:

The IRIG-DECODER engine generates one pulse per second (PPS) which is used to synchronize a 40 MHz oscillator with software PLL (phase locked loop). The result is an ultra stable 40 MHz clock source which is completely free of drift over time.

Out of this 40 MHz base clock, the programmable clock divider generates the clock frequency for the data acquisition system. Due to the over-clocking of delta sigma converters, a special output clock is required for synchronized sampling. This is available on a RJ45 connector for clocking ORION-xx24 and ORION-xx22 series cards. The communication to the host is provided over native USB interface.

12-2 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Connect the IRIG signal

When this option is installed within your Dewetron system, you will find a BNC input labeled IRIG or IRIG IN.

This is where you need to connect the IRIG time code signal to the system.

This is an industry standard BNC connector, female. A mating BNC cable is not included with the IRIG-CLOCK option.

Configure the software

It is also necessary to configure DEWESoft to look for the IRIG card, and to properly format the time in its display to the IRIG standard. This should be done for you at the factory, but in the event that you need to reconfigure your system or create a new PROJECT under DEWESoft, please make sure that these settings are in place:

„

„

Under the SETTINGS menu of DEWESoft 7, click HARDWARE SETUP, then click the TIMING button.

On the selector, choose the DEWEIRIG-CLOCK option

The interface should then be located and shown on this screen. When hardware is successfully found, you can select either IRIG A or IRIG B as Coding type and AC modulated or DC signal type:

When this option is installed and configured, DEWESoft will behave a little differently than normal when you go

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-3

to aquire data. For example, since every acquistion should be precisely synchronized to the absolute time provided by IRIG, when you press STORE to start recording, you may briefly see the message:

WAITING FOR PPS...

This is the pulse per second which precedes each IRIG time message. This PPS is extremely precise in its location, and we use it to identify the exact beginning of the next second. The software reads the previous full time and date string from the IRIG interface via USB, then awaits the next PPS in order to begin the acquisition at an exactly known time.

In addition, the top right corner of the DEWESoft screen will show the IRIG TIME like this:

Above - the RED dot indicates flywheel mode

Above - the GREEN dot indicates LOCKED mode

If IRIG is lost for whatever reason, the system will “fly wheel,” meaning that it will continue to count the time using the clock on the A/D card. In this case, the IRIG time will be shown with a RED DOT in front of it. Of course, this mode is not locked to any absolute time reference, so over time, the time will drift. However, when time code is restored, the IRIG-CLOCK will lock on again and the time will be updated.

When the IRIG interface has a lock onto the time code, the date and time message will be shown with a GREEN

DOT in front of it.

When the IRIG signal is lost (indicated by the status light) during measurement, the IRIG-CLOCK will switch into

“Fly Wheel Mode”. When the IRIG signal is received again, the IRIG-CLOCK switches into “Normal Operation

Mode” and automatically creates a new data file. The nomenclature of the created datafile indicates that the IRIG signal was lost during measurement: <Original_Filename>.lostXXX. DSD where XXX represents a continuous number.

There are times when playing data back from tape, that suddenly a new section of tape has older data on it, and the time on the tape suddenly jumps backwards or forwards. DEWESoft will automatically close the current data file and open a new one, as mentioned above, and continue recording without interruption.

12-4 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

IRIG-CLOCK basic specifications

IRIG-CLOCK

Timing specs

Adjustment range:

Clock acc. IRIG locked:

Clock acc. IRIG unlocked:

System specifications

Input

AM code

Ratio (AM)

Impedance

Compatibility

Connector

Output:

Trigger

Scan clock

ORION-1624-SYNC

Power supply:

Operating temperature:

Storage temperature:

Humidity:

Vibration test:

Shape

Frequency

Power spectral density

Duration

Vibration test:

Shape

Frequency

Power spectral density

Duration

Shock:

Shape

Acceleration amplitude

Duration

Test in 3 axis, 3 shocks in each axis and direction

IRIG synchronized time base generator

±150 ppm without drift

< 1 ppm

IRIG code A or B; AM or DC

0.5 Vp-p to 10 Vp-p

3:1 ±10 %

20 kΩ

DC Level Shift TTL / CMOS Compatible

BNC female

Clock and Trigger for DAQ-systems

PPS (pulse per second), rising edge on time, 75 msec high time, TTL level compatible

10 Hz to 10 MHz, rising edge synchronized, 50 % duty cycle, TTL level compatible

LVDS compatible synchronisation bus for ORION-xx24 series

Powered via USB interface, max current 250 mA

+5 °C to +70 °C

-20 °C to +85 °C

10 to 85 %, non condensing

EN 600068-2-6

Sine

10 Hz to 150 Hz

1 m/s2 / Hz from 10 – 200 Hz

30 Minutes per axis

EN 60721-3-2 Class 2M2

Random

10 Hz to 200 Hz

1 m/s2 / Hz from 10 – 200 Hz

30 Minutes per axis

EN 60068-2-27

Half-sine

15 g

11 ms

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-5

GPS-CLOCK time code interface card

The purpose of the GPS-CLOCK is to synchronize the data acquisition performed by your Dewetron system with an absolute time reference known as UTC (Universal Time Code), as qcuired from the GPS (Global Positioning

Satellites) circling the Earth.

The GPS-CLOCK-INT is a small printed circuit board that is factory installed within the Dewetron chassis, and wired internally to the USB interface, power, and to the clock input of the master A/D card. There is also an external version of this GPS time code interface known as the GPS-CLOCK-EXT. This section will focus on the internal version, since this is far more common, and the architecture is identical between the two.

The following block diagram gives a basic overview of the functionality of this interface:

The base of any GPS receiver is precise time measurement. In addition to the position information a precise PPS

(pulse per second) is generated by the GPS engine. This pulse is used to synchronize a 40 MHz oscillator with software PLL (phase locked loop). The result is an ultra stable 40 MHz clock source which is completely free of drift over time.

Out of this 40 MHz base clock, the programmable clock divider generates the clock frequency for the data acquisition system. Due to the over-clocking of delta sigma converters, a special output clock is required for synchronized sampling. This is available on a RJ45 connector for clocking the DEWE-ORION-1624.

The communication to the host is provided over USB or standard RS-232 interface.

Connect the antenna

Your Dewetron system will have a TNC connector mounted on a side panel. Please use the included cable to connect the antenna to the Dewetron system via this connector:

12-6 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Configure the software for TIMING

It is also necessary to configure DEWESoft to look for the GPS card, and to properly format the time in its display to the UTC standard. This should be done for you at the factory, but in the event that you need to reconfigure your system or create a new PROJECT under DEWESoft, please make sure that these settings are in place:

„

„

Under the SETTINGS menu of DEWESoft 7, click HARDWARE SETUP, then click the TIMING button.

On the selector, choose the DEWEGPS-CLOCK option

The interface should then be located and shown on this screen.

Mounting the GPS antenna

The antenna supplied with the GPS-CLOCK is designed to be mounted with the included mounting kit. The positioning of the antenna is critical to the correct operation of the system.

The antenna picks up the signals from up to 12 satellites which are all in different places in the sky. These satellites are not necessarily directly overhead, and can often be close to the horizon. Therefore it is best to mount the aerial in a way, that the least amount of metal obscures the view of the sky. On a domed roof, place the aerial on the top of the dome. On an open car with a roll-over bar, place the aerial horizontally on the highest point of the roll-over hoop and tape the wire securely to the frame. Although the VGPS can work with at least three satellites, it’s precision increases the more satellites it finds. If one satellite disappears over the horizon, or behind an object, there are other satellites still in view.

In order to fix your antenna on a tube, use the provided universal mounting adaptor. The image on the left shows you, how you have to fix the tube with the screws (1) , (2).

-

Note: the maximum diameter is limited to 43 mm (1.7 inch). Otherwise the universal mounting adapter will not fit on the tube.

The GPS-CLOCK is shipped with a 6 m antenna cable as standard. However, 15 and 25 m antenna cables are available optionally:

„

„

PC-GPS-CBL15 cable - 15 m

PC-GPS-CBL25 cable - 25 m

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-7

Warm-Up time

When the GPS-CLOCK is used for the first time, has been moved more than 200 km or not used for 10 hours

(since last usage), it is recommended to perform a ‘cold start’. To get the best performance from your GPS in the future, perform this cold start in an open place with a good all round view to the sky. Allow the GPS to map the satellites for at least 20 to 30 minutes. The GPS builds up the ‘Ephemeris’ data on each satellite which is stored in a non-volatile memory, and means future satellite tracking is swift and stable. Once the GPS has carried out a successful cold start, future satellite lock from power up will take between 15 seconds and 1 minute. Before going to test in a shady environment with tall objects or near to trees, allow the GPS to settle in an open space for 5 to

10 minutes.

GPS-CLOCK Notes

Max. freq: The maximum output frequency of the GPS-CLOCK is 10 MHz for standard clock output and 200 kHz for ORION-xx24 and ORION-xx22 card operation.

No. of clocks: If an ORION-xx24 or ORION-xx22 series card is installed, a synchronized clock source is available for clocking the A/D board. In the standard operation mode a second clock source is available

(reserved for future use).

Corr. limit: For synchronizing the internal oscillator with the PPS signal at least 4 satellites are required. If the GPS signal is lost during acquisition the GPS-CLOCK continues sourcing the data acquisition system with a precision clock source. Without synchronising to the GPS signal, the oscillator may drift. Therefore the absolute time synchronisation can not be guaranteed anymore. However, as soon the GPS signal is available again, the GPS- CLOCK recognizes a possible drift and tries to correct this inaccuracy. If the drift during the free-run time is higher than the defined “Correction limit”, a new data file is automatically generated with exact time stamping.

-

The maximum allowed correction limit is 500 ms.

The graph below gives an idea how the GPS-CLOCK behaves when the GPS signal is lost during data acquisition.

In this example the drift of the oscillator is smaller than the allowed correction limit:

A) This state shows the normal operation. The internal clock is synchronized to the GPS once per second.

12-8 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

B)

C)

At this point the number of acquired satellites is lower than 4. The unit stops automatically looking for the GPS time.

In the free-run operation the oscillator drift is very apparent.

D)

E)

After receiving again the GPS signal the error during the free run cycle is calculated.

Because the oscillator drift is smaller than the defined correction limit the GPS-CLOCK automatically corrects the drift for getting again time synchronized data. So the data acquisition is not interrupted although the GPS signal was lost. The correction is done with the maximum rate of 5 μs/sec.

But if the interrupt is too long the oscillator drift may be higher than the defined correction limit. In this case automatically the existing data file is closed and a new file is generated with adding “Lost” of the current filename:

“DataFilennameLostX” where X is a running number for each GPS signal lost.

As soon the timing device is selected DEWESoft automatically sets the data acquisition hardware to external clocking for receiving the sample frequency out of the GPS-CLOCK. In addition to this each measurement starts synchronized with the PPS signal. The time information of the data file is taken out of the GPS-time and not anymore from the local PC time.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-9

GPS time display

During measurement, the top right corner of the DEWESoft screen will show the UTC TIME like this:

Above - the RED dot indicates that the number of USED SATELLITES is lower than the minimum required.

Above - the GREEN dot indicates that the number of USED SATELLITES is equal to or greater than than the minimum required.

Additionally recording speed, position, distance

In addition to providing a precise alignment of your data to the UTC time, the GPS-CLOCK can be used as a GPS sensor, providing speed, distance, latitude, longitude, and several other useful parameters. These values can be easily displayed and recorded into the data file. But you need to configure the GPS-CLOCK for this to be possible.

Configure the software for GPS

This should be done for you at the factory, but in the event that you need to reconfigure your system or create a new PROJECT under DEWESoft, please make sure that these settings are in place:

„

„

Under the SETTINGS menu of DEWESoft 7, click HARDWARE SETUP, then click the GPS button.

On the selector, choose the VGPS option

You will need to also configure the interface that these parameters are coming across. Typically this will be a COM port with a relatively high number. There is no harm in starting with the highest com port number and working your way down until you find the correct one. The screen will show all of the parameters available for setting when the GPS-CLOCK interface is correctly identified here.

12-10 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Be sure to press in USED for any channel that you want to be recorded and visible when you store data. The satellite map also shows you a repsentation of the sky, according to how the antenna is positioned. The total number of satellites (maximum is 12) as well as the number of satellites whose signals are strong enough to be used by the

GPS-CLOCK are shown. The relative darkness of the green color indicates their strength.

X absolute:

Y absolute:

Z:

Velocity:

Longitude component of position in degrees, minutes and fraction of minutes

Latitude component of position in degrees, minutes and fraction of minutes

Altitude in meters above sea level

Speed over ground (vector of all 3 dimensions) (can be scaled in miles or km or knots)

Velocity Z:

Direction:

-

Used sat:

Vertical component of the speed vector

True track over ground, from 0 to 360 degrees

Distance: Integration of speed for getting the displacement.

Note: Only speed levels above 0.5 km/h are used to calculate the distance

Numbers of satellites used for calculation of position and speed

The field <PPS sync> and <Differential mode> change their colors from grey to green depending if the appropriate feature is available at the moment (green means available).

The PPS synch is used for hardware synchronization to analog channels. This will eliminate the time shift caused due the calculation time of the GPS receiver and of the data transfer time of the RS-232 port.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-11

GPS-CLOCK basic specifications

DEWE-GPS-CLOCK

Timing specs

Trigger accuracy:

Clock acc. GPS locked:

Clock acc. GPS unlocked:

Clock/Trigger signal level:

GPS specs

General:

PPS accuracy:

Refresh rate:

Position accuracy:

Autonomous

Differential

System specifications

Input:

Outputs:

Power supply:

Operating / storage temp / humidity:

Vibration:

GPS synchronized time base generator

250 ns without drift

< 1 ppm

TTL (LVDS for ORION-1624)

12 channel , L1 frequency receiver

250 ns

1 Hz

Horizontal CEP

3.0 m

1.0 m

Horizontal 95 %

5 m

3m

TNC connector for GPS antenna

Speed, displacement, RS-232, USB, Timebase generator

8 to 18 VDC

-30 °C to +80 °C / -40 °C to +85 °C / 95 % RH non condensing @ +60 °C

0.008 g2/ Hz

0.05 g2/ Hz

3 dB/octave

5 to 20 Hz

20 to 100 Hz

100 to 900 Hz

12-12 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

VIDEO-FG-4 interface card

This is a PCI card with four NTSC/PAL video inputs on it, presented on standard BNC connectors on the side of your Dewetron system. With this option and DEWESoft-PROF level software, you can acquire and display up to four video streams simultaneously in sync with your data.

It accepts standard composite colors (PAL, NTSC) or monochrome video formats (CCIR, EIA).

The supported resolution is programmable and includes square-pixel (640 x 480 or 768 x 576) and broadcast resolution. Before captured images are transferred to the PC’s memory, images can be scaled down using available selectable ratios.

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

„

Image Acquisition

Frame Rate: 30 full-frame images acquired per second for each channel.

Color Image: Color video format is compatible with the following composite video input formats:

NTSC-M, NTSC-Japan, PCL-B, PALD, PAL-G, PAL-H, PAL-I, PAM-M, PAL-N and SECAM

Monochrome Image: The monochrome video acquisition is compatible with CCIR and EIA (RS-170).

Optional Scaling: The acquire images or portions of images can be optionally scaled:

Acquisition of a programmable area of interest

Scaling of the image (down to 1:16)

Adjustment of hue (for NTSC signals), contrast (0 to 200%), brightness and saturation (0 to 200% for U and V signals)

Automatic chrominance gain control

It is necessary to install the driver for this card under Windows before it can be used within DEWESoft. Additionally, each of the inputs must be configured as a DirectShow video channel. This must be done for each of the four video inputs by following the instructions in the manual for this product.

The OEM source for this card is Adlink, part number PCI-RTV24. Please refer to that technical information for details.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-13

video interface setup

Once the card is installed and configured for DirectShow under Windows, run DEWESoft and then go to hardware setup under the SETTINGS button. Click the VIDEO button to see the setup for your cameras and video inputs:

You need to enable DIRECTX video via the checkbox. When you do, the VIDEO-FG4 card should show up automatucally, and four video channels should appear in the list. If this does not happen, then the card is not set up properly under Windows, because DEWESoft will always see any properly configured DirectX video sources that are available under Windows.

Be sure that the ENABLED column is set to YES for each of the video streams that you want to be able to display and record.

In the bottom section you can choose the type of video files that will be created, and the compression format.

Once this is done, and you return to the SETUP screens, you will have a new button called VIDEO in the toolbar.

Click it to access the video streams, preview them, and activate them for display and recording.

As always, be sure to press in as USED any of the video streams or cameras that you want to be able to display and record with your data files.

12-14 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Displaying video channels

Video streams are displayed almost like any other channel, except that there is a special video display widget that is used. Enter the design mode and find the icon that looks like a roll of film, and click it to add one video display widget to your screen:

The video widget is shown highlighted in yellow, above. After you click it to add a video window, you can select any USED video streams from the channel list to put them onto your screen. The video widget can be scaled and moved freely into an attractive arrangement on your display:

-

Note: video streams also create a channel which contains the frame count. You can display this count in a digital meter as a convenience.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-15

ARINC-429 and MIL-STD-1553 interfaces

ARINC 429 and 1553 bus interfaces are available for your Dewetron system, in both PCI card and external USB box format. The OEM supplier of these interfaces is Ballard Technologies. Dewetron systems support the Omnibus line of cards and rack-mounting boxes, as well as the so-called “fifth generation” of lower cost Ballard PCI cards.

The software interface into DEWESoft is in the form of a software plugin, which is an option called DEWESoft-

OPT-ARINC/1553.

-

With the Omnibus series you can have a single card with both ARiNC 429 and 1553 interfaces on it. in the

USB and 5th generation PCi series, there is one bus type maximum per interface.

The plugin will be installed and configured at the factory, however, if you need to reinstall the plugin, please copy

Ballard.dll to the Addons folder of DEWESoft. If you are running Windows 7, plugins need to be registered, and there is a button for that on the plugins page of the DEWESoft hardware setup screen.

When this is done, the Ballard plugin will appear in Hardware setup plugin list.

Refer to Ballard manual for installation of Ballard drivers and connecting Ballard devices.

First checkmark the Ballard plugin to enable it. If any devices will be found they will be shown at Devices panel.

If hardware configuration changes, just press the Search button and system will be rescanned.

If you want to use previous recorded data or/and don’t have hardware, you can use a replay mode. Checkmark it and select any csv file with device definition and bus data.

At the top you have save messages check box for saving replay files. Just check it and one csv file for each device

(core) will be created along with DEWESoft data file when recording (on the same folder with the same name).

Under it is one button for each bus. Short name on the button is composed of device number, channel number and channel type. MIL-STD-1553 buses have two tabs, one for receive and one for transmit.

12-16 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

ARINC 429 receive setup

In addition to standard buttons for adding and deleting messages or channels and display options there is a scan check box. If it is checked every unhandled message coming through the bus will be added automatically to the list. On start every message already had standard channels (SDI, SSM and Parity). They can be deleted if you do not need them. Bus speed and Parity check are there for ARINC 429 bus control. Messages that do not have proper parity will be ignored.

In the table you can see all messages and channels and live data. Labels are always in octal notation, and for the message value you can choose between hex and binary (right click on the VALUES column). Messages are always ordered by their labels. Some properties like color and name can be changed directly on the table and for others you must open SETUP. In the SETUP dialog you can add channels and manage their properties.

There is no problem to have more messages with the same label (and SDI filter) and/or more channels using same bits. When the message will come through the bus all that messages and channels will catch its data.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-17

ARINC 429 transmit setup

Here you have buttons for adding and deleting messages and for sorting them. Bus speed is for ARINC 429 bus setup.

Two types of messages can be created. Button and Schedule.

Schedule messages will be send automatically in intervals which are defined with MIN INT and MAX INT values.

The schedule is created and scheduled messages start to transmit after you leave the tab by entering some other tab or entering the measure mode.

Button messages are never sent automatically. You get a button to send them manually. In setup mode the button for each Button message is on the table, and in Measure mode you get the special window with buttons for all that messages.

12-18 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

MIL-STD-1553 receive setup

As in the ARINC 429 setup there are standard buttons for adding and deleting messages or channels and display options. There is also a scan check box. If SCAN is checkmarked, every unhandled message coming through the bus will be added automatically to the list.

In the table you can see all messages, channels and live data. Messages are always ordered by their addresses.

Some properties like color and name can be change directly on the table and for others you must open SETUP. In the SETUP dialog you can add channels and manage their properties.

There is no problem to have more messages with the same address and/or more channels using same word/bits.

When the message will come through the bus all that messages and channels will catch its data.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-19

MIL-STD-1553 transmit setup

Here you have buttons for adding and deleting messages and for sorting them.

Every message has the Edit button which opens Transmit message setup form where all message properties and data can be set.

Two types of messages can be created. Button and Schedule.

Schedule messages will be send automatically in the same order they have in the list. After each message there can be wait time which can be defined in Wait time column. After last message is sent the schedule starts will the first message again. The schedule is created and scheduled messages start to transmit after you leave the tab by entering some other tab or entering the measure mode.

Button messages are never sent automatically. You get a button to send them manually. In setup mode the button for each Button message is on the table, and in Measure mode you get the special window with buttons for all that messages.

Storing ARINC/1553 data

ARINC and 1553 channels pressed in as USED on the setup screen will be stored into the data file when you store data. It does not matter if the channels are shown on a display screen or not.

Processing ARINC/1553 data in MATH

ARINC and 1553 channels can be used within your MATH channels just like any other channel.

12-20 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

CAN BUS interfaces

In terms of hardware, Dewetron systems are available with several different CAN BUS interfaces. However, 90% of the systems delivered have the 2 CAN BUS interfaces that are provided as options from a Dewetron ORION series A/D card. If you look at the model numbering of our ORION cards, you will see that the last digit changes according to which options are installed on the card, like this: model name

ORION-1616-100

ORION-1616-101

ORION-1616-102

ORION-1616-103

ORION-1616-104

ORION-1616-105 last digit

0 (even)

1 (odd)

2 (even)

3 (odd)

4 (even)

5 (odd) description the standard card

Adds 2 x CAN BUS interfaces

The standard card plus more counters + digital inputs

The standard card plus more counters + digital inputs + 2 x CAN BUS interfaces

The standard card plus ADVANCED counters + digital inputs

The standard card plus ADVANCED counters + digital inputs + 2 x CAN BUS interfaces

You can see from the table above that basically any ORION card whose model name ends in an odd number has the CAN interfaces on it. In addition to the hardware option, you must have the software option called DEWE-

Soft-OPT-CAN installed.

The actual CAN bus interface connectors installed on your unit are shown in SECTION 4, SIGNAL INPUT CON-

NECTORS in this document. That page also shows you how to connect to the CAN BUS, including using termination resistors if needed.

If you want to use either one of the CAN bus interfaces to connect a Dewetron CPAD2 series module, please see

SECTION 10, CONDITIONERS, CPAD2 within this document.

Your CAN interfaces should be set up already at the factory, however, if you need to check or reconfigure the settings, please check the HARDWARE SETUP under the SETTINGS menu. Then click the CAN button to see the

CAN hardware interface setup:

Use the selector to choose the CAN device that is installed within your system. Here is a basic description of what each entry refers to:

Test CAN (replay mode) - for demonstration and training purposes, you may select this even if you do not have the CAN software option, and point the software to a CAN bus data file (CSV), which it will replay through the system for you.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-21

National Instruments - select this if your system has a National Instruments brand PCI-CAN/2 interface card.

Softing - select this if you are using a compatible Softing brand CAN BUS interface card

Vector - select this if you are using a compatible Vector brand CAN BUS interface card

Dewetron DAQ - select this option if your system has any 16-bit ORION card with the CAN option

Dewetron DSA - select this option if your system has any 22- or 24-bit ORION card with the CAN option

⇒

Note - if your DEWESoft license does not include the CAN option, you will not be able to proceed with hardware setup after selecting a real CAN interface card. Please contact Dewetron for a license upgrade.

After doing the hardware setup, please visit the CH SETUP screens and click on the CAN icon, which will appear there in the toolbar.

At first you will have no channels or messages being shown. This is normal.

Notice that there are buttons for CAN0 and CAN1. That is because there are two CAN interfaces in nearly every system. Your system could even have more -- in which case you will have additional buttons for CAN2, CAN3, etc.

The maximum is 8 interfaces in one Dewetron system.

It is essential to select the correct SPEED of the bus, in kBaud. Dewetron CAN hardware supports speeds up to 1

Mb (1,000,000 bits per second). 500 kb is the default.

⇒

Selecting a wrong SPEED of the CAN bus can actually interfere with certain systems, so please take care to select the correct one.

Setting up your channels

It is important to know that the CAN data stream does not contain any information about the channels that are being conveyed within the 64-bit messages. Therefore you need to know the configuration. Most car companies are very secretive about the CAN message layout, and do not release this information. Dewetron does not have any information about the CAN message layout from any car maker. However, there are third party programs such

12-22 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

as CANALYZER which you could use to help in this area. This product is not affiliated with Dewetron in any way.

A great invention of Vector corporation is the DBC file. This is essentially a standardized flat file which contains the information about a given CAN messaging layout. If you have a DBC file, you may import it right here and set up all of your channels instantly. Click the IMPORT button under the label DBC library, and then select the DBC file that you would like to apply.

Scan for messages

Another approach is to checkmark the SCAN button. When you do this, DEWESoft will “listen” on this bus and identify all of the CAN messages that are coming across, and create messages for them here. DEWESoft will show you how many messages it has found above the SCAN button.

-

-

SCAN can only find messages that appear during the time the system is scanning. Not all CAN messages are coming across the bus all the time! Some messages only report errors, for example, so you might have to scan for days or weeks to see them all this way. Yet other messages will only appear based on a specific query, and will thus never appear unless you cause them to report on the bus.

SCAN can only find messages; it cannot identify the channels within the messages

Of course, since each message might contain any number of channels, starting at various bits and running any bit length, and with any scaling factors, it is still impossible to know just from the messages, what the bits represent, but it gives you a starting point. As mentioned, the easiest way is by importing a DBC file, which contains everything already.

But if you need to configure channels manually, the procedure is quite simple.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-23

Configuring message and channels manually

You can add messages manually by clicking the Message + button (or using SCAN as mentioned above). To configure the channels contained within a message, click the SETUP button for a message, and the CAN CHANNEL

SETUP box will open:

In the top half of this dialog you set up the message itself, where in the bottom half you can configure the channels contained within this message.

Message setup

Looking at the top half, message configuration, here are the key things to know about:

Name The name of the message

Arb ID#

Type

DLC

Delay

ID number of your message on the CAN bus

Select between CAN standard and CAN extended from drop down list. Those two differs in identifier length. The standard length is 11 bits, and extended is 29 bits.

DLC is the length of the message. It ranges from 1 to 8. As a standard, the DLC is set to 8.

We can also enter the message delay in millisecond which shifts the time stamp of the message back in time. This can be used to perfectly synchronize the analog data with CAN data with compensating the delays in digital data transmission.

12-24 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

Channel setup

Now we need to add the channel(s) contained within this message. Click the ADD button and DEWESoft will create a default channel and color code the first 16 bits of the CAN message. Please enter the name and units of this channel, and the scale factor (multiplier and offset). Also, make sure that the start bit and length (in bits) are correct. Then click OK. You can see that in the screen shot below, four channels have been set up within this one message. Two of the channels are just one bit long, whereas the other ones are

Or, if this message contains multiple channels, repeat the procedure starting with the ADD button mentioned above, and create more channels. Within a message, there can be numerous channels, and each one can be absolutely unique in terms of its bit length, scaling, name, units... CAN is really quite flexible.

Arbitration IDs and CAN message rates

CAN messages are identified via hex IDs known as “Arbitration IDs.” This is what DEWESoft shows on the message list, in the ARB column:

Below the Arbitration ID, the rate at which this message is coming across the bus is also shown in Hz. You will notice that each message can come across at a different rate.

J1939 support

J1939 is used to enable special decoding of arbitration ID which includes the sender, receiver and the message

ID itself. Arb ID is always extended in this case. This is most widely used on trucks, busses and certain military vehicles. Please make sure that the bus type is really J1939 before enabling this option.

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-25

OBD II support

DEWESoft additionally supports the protocol for reading in data from the OBD II port, required on all US cars.

In this case, the messages are standardized, and a DBC file is not needed. This feature requires that an optional plugin be purchased and installed into DEWESoft.

Select messages / channels for storage

Notice the buttons near the top of the CAN setup window labeled VIEW:

It is important to go to the CHANNELS view, and then press USED for the channels that you want to really record and display next time you store data.

⇒

if you press USED only on the MESSAGES view, the actual message iD itself will be stored, but not the channel(s) that it contains!!! Always go to CHANNELS view and press in USED for all channels that you want to display and store.

After clicking CHANNELS, you will see a list of all of the channels contained within the various CAN messages that you have set up:

Make sure to press USED in on the channels that you want to store and display. We cannot emphasize that enough.

OK, your CAN interface is set up.

When you save this Dewesoft SETUP, all of the CAN parameters are saved into the setup file, of course. But some-

12-26 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

times it is useful to be able to save this CAN setup as a DBC file. This is possible, as described in the next section.

Saving DBC files

Saving your CAN setup to a stand-alone DBC file requires a software option called DEWESoft-OPT-CAN-OUT.

This option is needed because the DBC file format is proprietary to Vector, a company not affiliated with Dewetron. With this software option, we include a license from Vector, which we purchase from them and transfer to you, so that you gain the ability to export your CAN setup to a standard Vector DBC file. This DEWEsoft-CAN-

OUT option also includes the ability to transmit CAN messages onto the bus. Please see the separate documentation about these capabilities for further details.

Displaying CAN channels

Whichever CAN channels are pressed in as USED on the CAN setup screen, will be displayed on the measure screens, as shown below. We made a simple screen which populates the CAN channels into digital meters. Below that, each of the four wheel speed channels are shown in a recorder graph.

Notice that the CAN channels are shown on the right side of the screen in the CHANNEL LIST. A nice feature is that the channels contained within each message are collapsed into a group whose name is the same as the message name:

OWNER’s GUIDE - sECTION 12, INTERFACE CARDs | 12-27

So you can see that the message called SteeingWheel has four channels within it.

The CAN messages and channels will disappear from this list if you click on a display type which is incompatible.

For example, CAN is too slow to show in a SCOPE or FFT graph. So if you click on a SCOPE or FFT graph, the

CAN channels will disappear from the channel list. This is the same with other very slow data, like from PAD,

EPAD2 or CPAD2 modules, for example.

Storing CAN data

Any CAN channels pressed in as USED on the CAN setup screen will be stored into the data file when you store data. It does not matter if the channels are shown on a display screen or not.

Processing CAN data in MATH

CAN channels can be used within your MATH channels just like any other channel.

12-28 | OWNER’s GUIDE - DEWE-3210 sERIEs

OWNER’s GUIDE - APPENDIx | A-i

Appendix

Index

Symbols

2D array 3-5

2-point scaling method 7-9

3D array 3-5

22-bit A/D converter 3-3

,

7-19

,

9-10

,

10-51

,

10-52

,

10-61

,

10-69

,

10-73

,

10-75

,

10-78

,

10-100

,

10-107

,

10-111

,

10-

114

,

11-1

,

11-4

,

11-5

,

11-6

,

11-7

1553 3-2

,

3-7

,

12-1

,

12-15

,

12-18

,

12-19

A

Accessory connector 4-12

Accuracy 6-13

AC power cord 5-1

Acquisition Mode 3-4

,

3-6

,

7-1

Acquisition Screens 7-21

Activate the Channels 7-4

AD16-1000-16 11-11

AD16-1000-16-OUT2 11-11

AD32-1000-16 11-11

AD32-1000-16-OUT4 11-11

AD64-100-16 11-11

AD64-1250-12 11-11

ADAP-BAN-BNC 9-4

ADAP-BNC-MICRODOT 9-2

ADAP-BR-1/4-120, using it 9-4

,

9-9

ADAP-BR-1/4-350 9-4

ADAP-CAN-OPT-ISO 9-2

ADAP-DAQ-BNC 9-3

ADAP-MDAQ-BNC 9-3

ADAP-MIC-BNC-CBL 9-4

ADC 6-1 address, Dewetron Inc. ii

,

4-11

,

10-6

,

10-8

,

10-65

,

10-67 addressing module 10-8

Add your company logo to printouts

7-32

Adlink 12-12

AD series 3-1

,

3-2

,

10-58

,

10-114

,

11-1

,

11-11 amplifier column 10-7

,

10-8

,

10-66

,

10-67

ANALOG INPUT connector 4-11

Analog input connectors 4-9

Analog output 10-4

Analog Output module 10-74

ANALOG setup screen 7-2

,

7-19

Analysis Mode 3-6

,

7-1

,

7-27

,

7-33 anti-aliasing 10-114

,

11-4

,

11-5

,

11-6

,

11-7 antivirus/security software 2-3

Arbitration ID 12-24

ARINC 429 3-7

ARINC-429 12-15

ARINC 429 receive setup 12-16

ARINC 429 transmit setup 12-17

Audio 3-3

,

4-2

,

4-7

,

9-4

Automatic File Numbering 7-16

Automatic file SWITCHING function 7-18

Automatic Recording STOP function 7-16

B

Background image 3-5

Ballard 12-15

BAT-CHARGER-1 5-2

BATT-95WH 5-2

,

8-2

Battery appears damaged 5-1 battery door 5-1

Battery handling 5-1

BATTERY STATUS LCD 5-1

BIOS 2-3

,

5-3 break-out box 10-71

BUS interfaces 3-7

,

4-10

,

7-20

C

calibration 1-2

Calibration 1-2

CANALYZER 12-22

CAN bus interfaces 3-2

CAN channels, displaying 12-26

CAN data, performing MATH

12-27

CAN data, storing 12-27

CAN message rates 12-24

CAN output 3-2

,

3-7

Carrying bag 3-3

CAT5e 4-5

CAT6 4-5

,

10-114

CD 5-4

A-ii | Appendix certificate of compliance 1-2 channel name, units, color 7-7

,

7-11

Channel Setup 7-5 channel setup dialog 7-4 coefficients 3-4

CONN-DSUB-9 9-3

Connectors 4-1

,

4-3

,

4-5

,

4-7

,

4-9

,

4-10

Copying Channel Settings 7-13

Copy/Paste menu 7-13

Core2Duo® 3-3

,

3-4

Counter 3-2

,

3-4

,

4-9

,

6-2

,

6-3

,

6-5

,

6-6

,

6-7

,

6-8

,

6-13

Counter/Encoder 3-2

Counter Filters 6-15

CPAD2 3-1

,

10-1

,

10-101

CPAD2 modules, adding new modules 10-102

CPAD2-RTD8 10-102

,

10-104

CPAD2-TH8 10-102

,

10-104

CPAD2-TH8-x 10-102

,

10-104

CPAD2-V8 10-102

,

10-104

CPU 3-3

,

3-4

Current sensors, using 9-8

Cursor 3-6 cursors 3-6

,

7-27

,

7-29

,

7-30

D

DAQ Module Connectors 10-1

DAQ modules, adding new modules

10-6

DAQ modules, Addressing 10-6

DAQN-V-OUT 10-4

DAQP-ACC-A 10-3

DAQP-BRIDGE-A 10-3

,

10-30

DAQP-BRIDGE-B 10-38

,

10-42

,

10-44

,

10-46

,

10-48

,

10-50

,

10-56

,

10-58

,

10-68

,

10-70

,

10-71

,

10-72

,

10-74

,

10-80

,

10-86

,

10-90

,

10-94

,

10-96

,

10-98

,

10-99

,

10-104

,

10-

106

,

10-108

,

10-110

,

10-112

DAQP-CFB 10-3

DAQP-CHARGE-A 10-3

DAQP-CHARGE-B 10-3

DAQP-DMM 10-2

,

10-12

DAQP-FREQ-A 10-4

DAQP-HV 10-2

,

10-10

DAQP-HV-S3 10-2

,

10-10

DAQP-LA-B 10-2

,

10-20

DAQP-LA-SC 10-2

,

10-20

DAQP-LV 7-6

,

10-2

,

10-14

DAQP-MULTI 10-4

DAQP-STG 10-3

,

10-22

DAQP-THERM 10-4

DAQP-V 10-2

,

10-18

DAQ-SHUNT-1 9-3

,

10-14

,

10-17

DAQ-SHUNT-1 adapter, using it

9-5

DAQ-SHUNT-1-BNC 9-3

DAQ-SHUNT-3 9-3

,

10-14

,

10-17

DAQ-SHUNT-4 9-3

,

10-14

,

10-17

DAQ-SHUNT-5 9-3

,

10-14

,

10-17

Data export 3-6

Data file format 3-5

Data replay 3-6

DBC file 12-22

,

12-26

DBC files, saving 12-26

DC power cord 5-2

DC power input 4-1

,

5-2

Default Display Range 7-11

Delay 12-23

Design mode 7-34

DEWE-30-8 expansion rack 10-5

DEWE-30-16 rack 10-5

DEWE-3210 3-1

,

3-2

,

3-3

,

4-9

,

4-11

,

6-1

,

9-10

,

10-62

,

10-

100

DEWE-3211 1-2

,

2-4

,

3-1

,

3-2

,

4-9

,

6-1

,

9-10

,

10-62

,

10-100

DEWE-DCDC-24-300-ISO 8-3

DEWESoft 7 3-4

DEWESoft-OPT-ARINC/1553

12-15

Dewetron ii

,

1-1

,

1-2

,

2-1

,

2-3

,

3-3

,

3-7

,

4-4

,

4-7

,

5-2

,

6-1

,

7-1

,

7-8

,

7-20

,

7-25

,

7-64

,

8-1

,

8-2

,

9-4

,

9-10

,

10-1

,

10-6

,

10-8

,

10-15

,

10-17

,

10-43

,

10-45

,

10-47

,

10-51

,

10-62

,

10-64

,

10-65

,

10-67

,

10-77

,

10-78

,

10-100

,

10-101

,

10-

102

,

10-105

,

10-107

,

10-109

,

10-111

,

10-113

,

11-1

,

A-x

DEWE-VGPS-200C 3-7 digital filter 6-15

Digital inputs 3-7

Digital I/O connector 4-12

DirectShow 3-7

,

12-12

,

12-13

DIRECTX 12-13

Display Range 7-11

Display Range, Setting the Default

7-11

Display Scale 7-10

DLC 12-23

Documentation about your system

A-vii

DPS-2410 3-3

,

4-1

,

5-1

,

5-2

,

5-3

,

8-1

DSUB 37-pin connector, 4-12

DVD 3-3

,

5-4

DVD / CD drive 5-4

Dynamic acquisition rate 7-19

E

Encoder 3-2

,

6-1

,

6-2

,

6-9

,

6-10

,

6-11

,

6-12 encoders 3-7

,

6-9

,

7-20

End-of-Life Handling 2-3

EPAD2 3-1

,

3-2

,

10-1

,

10-101

EPAD2 modules, installing new ones

10-103

EPAD2-RTD8 10-102

,

10-104

EPAD2-TH8 10-102

,

10-104

EPAD2-TH8-x 10-102

,

10-104

EPAD2-V8 10-102

,

10-104

Ethernet 4-2

,

4-5

Event Counting 6-2

,

6-3

,

6-4

EVENTS 7-25

Export file formats 3-6

Export Your Data 7-33

F

FFT 3-5

,

3-6

,

7-21

,

7-22

FFT graph, 3-5 file conversion 7-33

File export button 7-33

OWNER’s GUIDE - APPENDIx | A-iii

File Name 7-16

File Numbering, automatic 7-16

FILL ONE MODULE PROCE-

DURE 10-6

,

10-65

FILL (or CLEAR) One Module

Procedure 10-7

,

10-66

Fill Rack (all Modules) Procedure

10-6

,

10-65

FILL RACK PROCEDURE 10-6

,

10-65 firewire 4-2

,

4-4

Flexpro 3-6

,

7-33

Fluke 1-2 fly wheel (IRIG) 12-3

Fly Wheel Mode 12-3

Frequency Measurement 6-2

,

6-13

Frequency to voltage 10-4 function scaling method 7-9

Fuse 4-1

G

Gated Event Counting 6-2

,

6-4

GPS 3-5

,

3-7

GPS antenna mounting 12-6

GPS-CLOCK 10-114

,

12-5

,

12-6

,

12-7

,

12-8

,

12-9

,

12-10

,

12-11

GPS-CLOCK basic specifications

12-11

GPS input TNC connector 12-5

GPS track 3-5

GPS warm-Up time 12-7 graph 3-5

,

3-6

,

7-6

,

7-9

,

7-10

,

7-11

,

7-12

,

7-13

,

7-23

,

7-24

,

7-25

,

7-28

,

7-29

,

7-30

Ground (earth) Connector 4-1 guide to operation 7-1

H

hard drive 5-3

,

5-4

,

7-2

Hazardous Substances 2-3

HDD 3-4

,

5-3

,

5-4 hot-swappable batteries 5-1

HSI 3-1 humidity 2-2

,

3-3

i

IEEE-1394 3-3

,

4-2

,

4-4

IEPE 3-7

,

10-2

,

10-3

,

10-14

,

10-22

,

10-42

,

10-44

,

10-46

Inductive 10-3

Inertial sensors 3-7

Input scaling 3-4

Installing the Smart Batteries 5-1

IRIG-CLOCK 10-114

,

12-1

,

12-2

,

12-3

,

12-4

IRIG-CLOCK basic specifications

12-4

IRIG-DECODER 12-1

IRIG IN connector 12-2

Isolation 3-2

J

J1939 3-2

,

3-7

,

12-24

,

12-25

K

Keyboard 3-3

L

LabVIEW 11-11

LabVIEW compatibility 11-11

LCD 3-3

,

5-1

,

5-3

,

8-2

LCD screen, battery indicator 5-1

LEMO 4-1

,

4-9

LVDT 10-3

M

Math channel 3-6

Matlab ii

,

3-5

,

3-6

Max value 7-7

,

7-11

MDAQ 3-1

,

7-6

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BE-S1 10-99

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU 10-99

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S1 10-99

MDAQ-AAF4-5-BU-S2 10-99

MDAQ-BASE-5 3-1

,

10-78

MDAQ-FILT-5-BE 10-98

,

10-104

,

10-106

,

10-108

,

10-110

,

10-112

MDAQ-FILT-5-BU 10-98

MDAQ-FILT-5-BU-S1 10-98

MDAQ-SUB-ACC 10-94

,

10-96

,

10-98

,

10-99

,

10-104

,

10-

106

,

10-108

,

10-110

,

10-112

MDAQ-SUB-BRIDGE 10-86

MDAQ-SUB-STG 10-80

,

10-86

MDAQ-SUB-V200 10-90

Met/CAL® 1-2

MIL-STD-1553 3-2

,

3-7

,

12-1

,

12-

15

,

12-18

,

12-19

MIL-STD-1553 receive setup 12-

18

MIL-STD-1553 transmit setup

12-19

Min value 7-7

,

7-11

Module Installation Trouble-shooting 10-8

,

10-67 modules are showing up in RED letters 10-8

,

10-67

MSI-V-ACC 8-4

,

10-2

,

10-14

,

10-

15

,

10-22

MSI-V-CH-50 8-4

,

10-2

,

10-14

,

10-15

,

10-22

MSI-V-RTD 8-4

,

10-2

,

10-14

,

10-

15

,

10-22

Multifile 7-16

,

7-17 multiplexed A/D 11-11

N

National Instruments 11-11

,

11-12

,

12-21 nCode ii network stacks 2-3

Neutrino-4 5-2

,

8-2

,

8-3

NIST ii

NIST traceable 1-2

Notice event 7-25

NTSC/PAL video inputs 12-12

O

OBDII 3-2

OBD II support 12-25

On-board RS-485 interface 11-3 operating system 5-3

,

5-4

A-iv | Appendix

Operation Guidelines 5-1 optical drive 5-4

Optical read/write drive 5-4

ORION 3-1

,

3-2

,

4-12

,

6-16

,

11-1

ORION-0424-200 11-1

,

11-4

,

11-11

ORION-0816-1000 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0816-1001 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0816-1002 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0816-1003 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0816-1004 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0816-1005 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0824-200 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0824-201 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0824-202 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0824-203 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0824-204 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-0824-205 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1616-100 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1616-101 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1616-102 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1616-103 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1616-104 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1616-105 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1622-100 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1622-101 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1622-102 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1622-103 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1622-104 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-1622-105 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-3216-100 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-3216-101 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-3222-100 11-1

,

11-5

ORION-3222-101 11-1

,

11-5

ORION cards, Combining various

11-2

ORION cards installation 11-10

ORION cards, synchronizing them

11-2

ORION card Windows driver

11-10

ORION-DAQ-SYNC 11-2

ORION-DSA-SYNC 11-2

ORION series 11-1

ORION-SYNC 10-114

Outline Drawings 3-8

Overview 1-2

,

3-5

,

7-21

P

PAD-AO1 10-63

,

10-74

PAD-CB8-B 10-68

,

10-107

,

10-111

PAD-CB8-BNC 10-68

PAD-CB8-RTD 10-63

,

10-70

,

10-71

PAD-DO7 10-63

,

10-72

PAD module, old type without buttons 10-8

,

10-67

PAD modules, adding new ones

10-64

PAD Modules Table 10-63

PAD Series Modules 10-61

PAD-TH8-P 10-63

,

10-70

PAD-V8-P 10-63

,

10-68

Paste special 7-14

Paste special… 7-14

Paste to all 7-14

PC-GPS-CBL15 cable 12-6

PC-GPS-CBL25 cable 12-6

PCM data 3-7

Period Time Measurement 6-2

,

6-6 polynomial 3-4

Pot/Ohmic sensors 10-3

Power 3-3

,

3-5

,

8-1 power cord 2-1

,

5-1

,

5-2

PPS, IRIG 12-3

Print Out Your Data 7-31

Project 7-37

,

7-38

,

7-41

,

7-42

,

7-43

,

7-44

,

7-46

,

7-59

,

7-60

PROPERTIES BAR 7-22

PS/2 4-2

,

4-3

,

4-4

Pulse Width Measurement 6-2

,

6-7

Q

Quadrature Encoder 6-2

,

6-9

,

6-10

,

6-11

Quick start guide 1-2

,

7-1

R

RAM 3-3

,

3-4

,

7-24

Recorder 3-5

,

3-6

,

7-21

,

7-22

,

7-23 recorder graph 3-6

,

7-24

,

7-25

,

7-28

,

7-29

,

7-30

Recording modes 3-4

Recording setup 3-4

Recycling 2-3

Reference Check 7-9

Relay Output module 10-72

Reloading your Data Files 7-26 remote power-on 11-3 removable hard disk drive 5-3

Replay speed 3-6

Resistance 10-3

,

10-4

,

10-14

,

10-22

RIBBON 7-22

RS-232/485 interface 10-62

RS232C 3-3

,

4-2

,

4-3

S

safety 2-1

,

2-2

Safety precautions 1-2

,

2-1

Sample rate 7-7

Sample Rate 7-19

Sample rate divider 7-7

Sample Rate, setting it 7-19

Save Your Setup 7-20

Scale/CAL 7-8

Scope 3-5

,

3-6

,

7-21

,

7-22

Screen design 3-5 sensors 1-1

,

1-2

,

2-1

,

3-4

,

3-7

,

4-7

,

4-10

Setup files 3-5

Setup file, saving 7-20

Set Up Your Channels 7-4

Shock and vibration 3-3

Shunt resistors, using custom 9-7

SideHAND ii

Sigma-delta 11-5

,

11-6

,

11-7 signal conditioner hardware control

7-6

Signal Input Connectors 4-9

Simultaneous sampling 10-114 slope 7-8

,

10-74

,

10-98

,

10-99 smart batteries 3-3

,

5-2

Softing 12-21

Software licensing 3-6

Sound sensors 3-7

Specifications 3-1

,

3-2

,

3-3

,

3-4

Specifications, Analog Input 3-1

,

3-8

,

4-1

STOP, Automatically 7-16

Stop storing. 7-25

Stop storing after 7-16

,

7-18

STORE and STOP buttons 7-35

STORING data 7-24

Strain gage 3-6

Support 1-1

,

1-2

SYNC 4-11

Synching Multiple systems 11-2 synchronizing external devices 10-

114 synchronizing multiple systems

10-114

System restore DVD 3-3

System Startup 5-1

T

TEDS 3-4

Temperature 3-3

,

10-4

,

10-14

,

10-

22

,

10-50

,

10-63

,

10-70

Text event 7-25

Thermocouple 10-3

,

10-4 time constant 10-3

TOOLBAR 7-22 touchpad 3-3 training 1-1

,

2-2 turn on (or off) all channels at once

7-4

Two Pulse Edge Separation 6-2

,

6-8

U

Unused (channels) 7-4 unzoom, how to 7-28

Up/Down Counter 6-2

,

6-5

USB 3-3

,

3-7

,

4-2

,

4-3

,

4-6

,

4-7

Used (channels) 7-4

v

Vector 12-21

VGA 3-3

,

4-6 video 3-3

,

3-7

,

4-2

,

4-4

,

4-6

,

4-7

,

7-20 video channels, displaying 12-14

VIDEO-FG-4 3-7

,

12-12

,

A-vii

Voice event 7-25

Voltage/current input configurations

6-1

W

Weight 3-3

Windows 7 ii

,

3-3

,

5-4

Windows updates 2-3

Windows XP ii

,

5-4

X

XLR 9-4

X-Y graph 3-5

X-YYY 3-5

Y

y = mx + b 7-8 y/t 3-5

Z

zoom 3-6

,

7-20

,

7-27

,

7-28

,

7-29

,

7-33

Zooming in 7-27 zooming out 7-27 zoom in/out 3-6

OWNER’s GUIDE - APPENDIx | A-v

A-vi | Appendix

Documentation about your system:

Model: (check)

Serial number:

Date shipped:

A/D card settings:

A/D card model name:

A/D card(s) details:

Conditioner settings:

Conditioner type(s): (check)

Specific modules (list all):

◊ DEWE-3210

◊ ORION-

◊ DEWE-3211

Reference number:

Order ref. number:

◊ AD-

D/I:

MDAQ modules

MDAQ-BASE-5

MDAQ-SUB-

MDAQ-SUB-

◊

CTR:

Other (list) ◊ DAQ modules

Slot 0:

Slot 1:

Slot 2:

Slot 3:

Slot 4:

Slot 5:

Slot 6:

Slot 7:

Expansion rack/modules (list):

DEWESoft settings:

CAN device:

VIDEO device:

GPS device:

ALARM OUT settings:

DEWESoft edition:

Amplifier interface: (check)

Additional xPAD modules:

Hardware key:

Software license:

Software options (list):

Interfaces/settings:

Optional interfaces installed:

Comments/more information:

Settings:

Settings:

Settings:

ANALOG OUT settings:

◊ SE, ◊ PROF, ◊ DSA, ◊ EE

◊ ORION Onboard, ◊ ORION Onboard

DW7-

◊ PCI-ARINC card

◊ VIDEO-FG-4

COM port:

◊ PCI-1553 card

◊ version 7.__ . ______

COM:

◊ PCI-CAN/2

◊

Dewetron, Inc. 10 High Street, Ste K, Wakefield, RI 02879 USA ¤ Tel: +1 401-284-3750 ¤ Fax: +1 401-284-3755 ¤ www.dewamerica.com